Home

ZLH Service Manual

1. Engine PCB ASSY Engine PCB ASSY 4 71 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y Laser unit LD harness 5P 8 Panel PCB Panel PCB Main PCB ASSY Laser unit Main PCB ASSY Thermistor 4 72 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL K Speaker I Main PCB ASSY A i h L H LVPS PCB ASSY 11 Main PCB ASSY 4 73 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL CHAPTER 5 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 1 1 1 To avoid creating secondary problems by mishandling follow the warnings below during maintenance work N WARNING 1 Always turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord from the power outlet before accessing any parts inside the machine 2 Some parts inside the machine are extremely hot immediately after the machine is used When opening the front cover or rear cover to access any parts inside the machine never touch the shaded parts shown in the following figures CONSUMABLE PARTS The consumable parts described in this section are parts which are subject to deterioration or damage and should be replaced at least once during the period of warranty of the product if any print quality problem appears Drum Unit Life expec
2. Hooks Back light PCB ASSY Panel PCB ASSY Fig 4 33 13 Release the two hooks and then remove the LCD holder LCD holder Control panel ASSY gt ES B S i SS D D Jb ECT SS as lt uS sd rae TS a NS sl A nj Co p Hooks us Fig 4 34 4 20 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 14 Release the two hooks and then remove the LCD 15 Release the three hooks and then remove the back light PCB ASSY Back light PCB ASSY LCD holder Hooks Hooks Fig 4 35 3 7 Document Scanner 1 Remove the four screws and then remove the document chute ASSY 2 Disconnect the two connectors scanning motor CIS unit Screws Screws Document chute ASSY CIS unit 4 21 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 3 As moving the hook upward remove the CIS unit Hook Document chute ASSY CIS unit Fig 4 37 4 Release the hook of the gear cover and then remove the gear cover 5 Remove the two screws and then remove the LF ground plate spring 6 Release the hook and then remove the ejection roller Ejection roller gt LF ground plate spring i c eeu Hook hx Gear cover Fig 4 38 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL Release the hook and then remove the LF roller 7 LF roller x O O I Document chute ASSY Fig 4 39 Remove the ejection pinch roller 8 Ejection pinch roller gt U u lt 2 5 c O E D E 5 O
3. 7 19 3 12 CIS Scanner Area Setting Maintenance mode Dh 7 20 3 13 Paper Feed and Paper Eject Test Maintenance mode Bi 7 21 3 14 EEPROM Customizing Maintenance mode 24 7 22 3 15 Display of the Equipment s Log Information Maintenance mode 80 7 23 3 16 Machine Error Code Indication Maintenance mode 97 7 25 3 17 Output of Transmission Log to the Telephone Line Maintenance mode 87 7 25 3 18 Cancellation of the Memory Security Mode Not applicable to the Japanese version 7 26 APPENDIX 1 EEPROM CUSTOMIZING CODES A 1 yi MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL APPENDIX 2 INSTALLING THE UPDATE DATA A 2 1 INSTALLING THE UPDATE DATA TO THE MACHINE A 2 1 1 Connecting the Machine to vourbt A 2 1 2 Setting up the Machine and our A 2 1 3 Installing the Update Data onto the Flash ROM of the Machine A 3 2 SETTING ID CODES TOMACHINEGS esee A 4 2 1 Connecting the Machine to vourbtC A 4 2 2 Setting Up the Machine and Your bt A 4 2 3 Running the Setup Ulm A 5 APPENDIX 3 FIRMWARE SWITCHS WSW A 6 APPENDIX 4 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS AA Man PCB Circuit Diagrami Wilde A 48 4 2 Main PCB Circuit Diagram 2 6 aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaanaaaanaananaanannananannaaaanananaanannaaanannaaaaaanaaa A 49 4 5 Mal POB Circuit Diagrami Eeer A 50 4
4. eene enne 6 26 MEI TB ES TU UT E mE ERU E 6 31 9 1 Image Defect Examples mision Rides 6 31 92 Diameter ol RONG sdn PON m m Umm 6 31 8 3 Troubleshooting Image Deier 6 32 8 4 Location of Grounding Contacts nennen nnne nnns 6 50 CF MP EI e 6 50 8 4 2 Machine body amp Paper tray aaiiaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa anaaaananaanaananananaaaaaanaaanannaanananaaaanananannananana 6 50 9 INCORRECT FRINTAU ancianas 6 51 TABLE OF CONTENTS 11 A o EE 6 53 10 1 Installation Problem asistieron 6 53 10 2 Intermittent Problem 6 54 10 3 TCP IP Troubleshooting linia 6 55 10 4 UNIX Troubleshooting aaiaaaaaaaaaaaaaaanaaaanaananaananuananannanaananuaaanaunannnananunaanannannaanananaananl 6 55 10 5 Windows NT LAN Server TCP IP Troublesbooting ccs 6 56 10 6 Windows 95 98 Me Peer to Peer Print LPR Troubleshooting 6 56 10 7 Windows 95 98 Me Peer to Peer HP JetAdmin Compatible Method Troubleshooting 6 56 10 8 Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 Peer to Peer Print NetBIOS Troubleshooting 6 57 10 9 Brother Internet Print TCP IP Troubleshooting a aannaaaaaaaaaan naaaananuaaaaaaanaaaanan 6 57 10 10 Windows 95 98 Me 2000 XP IPP Troubleshooting ecc 6 57 10 11 Novell Netware Troubleshooting naaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa anaaaananuaaanannaaannaanuaaanannaaaananaaaananl 6 58 10 12AppleTalk Troublesbootng 6 59 10 13DLC LLC Trouble
5. OO eh ek 0 0 eh sch OO O O NOW O OO eh Of OO O sch OO O O OO P NOTE WSW39 takes effect only in V 34 mode For the transmission speed setting in other modes refer to WSW19 e Selectors 1 through 8 First and last choices of transmission speed for fallback These selectors are used to set the modem speed range With the first transmission speed choice specified by selectors 1 through 4 the machine attempts to establish the transmission link via the modem If the establishment fails the machine automatically steps down to the next highest speed and attempts to establish the transmission link again The machine repeats this sequence while stepping down the transmission speed to the last choice specified by selectors 5 through 8 If the modem always falls back to a low transmission speed e g 24 000 bps set the first transmission speed choice to the lower one e g modify it from 31 200 bps to 26 400 bps in order to deactivate the high speed modem function and reduce the training time for shorter transmission time WSW39 will be limited by selectors 3 through 8 of WSWAO A 40 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL WSW40 Function setting 18 Not masking Masking j 3429 symbols sec 3 3200 symbols sec Masking of symbol rate s 3000 symbols sec 8 2800 symbols sec Not used 2400 symbols sec NOTE e WSWAO takes effect only in the V 34 mode e Selector 2 is applicable only to models equipped with a flat
6. e e EOvoo3 J ihg RO EA wes HEE tr vn BS NE ia a EN E 4d cel ET 1 40 1 70 1M 70 6 14 Pig eo ep 18 ja D co ER eet 48i che ADR 2 1 Deag Ty CH BEE vena 03 ig ADR 3 vee 7H2 gt 18I Hop c rU i Tu AOR y mes d vs e Eaev Ale mi es ARA anal Gas Aa Tap ee ee A ADA 4 mie 8 pi 2 ADRISI ARS 19 3 _ DATA F Atar giel sel _ DATA F 1 AM 7 eL ERE 17 2 DATA F 2 TA Amie 16 4 _ DATA F 3 TT ARIS 10 3 _ DATA F 4 PT ADR 10 DATA F 5 ee od e ad a ap Siti me cd Ce ment pbc A RR dr SRA AS ADAL 151 ADR loa vol DATA F 6 oalis6 nS O ADR 12 DATA F 7 eegene S ka NCC Poncii ee el e EEEO ADR 47 ADR 13 DATA F 8 NN E VOCE PR a Ge em pen ie a ae ie crane ne ai ADAL 18 ADR 14 DATA F 9 EC Le ge O ay ae T e ADRL 19 ADAI 15 DATA F 10 RAE A EE E EE Bette eege E EE apal201 ADAL 46 DATAF 114 e dc rem E cd i c RD aoRleal O O O O ADU el lung nol DATA F 12 Spil 15 2 _ DATA F 13 f ADRIA 1 14l 4 _DATA F 14 aonta _ o 14l 5 _ DATA F 15 ADR 241 sal EE 58 68 1 7A 1 78 3 1D DATA F 15 0 TUR aso aso no 12 xe aes ves ves vss 13 a ao aao neo nc ase ne ves xc xc sa LE ace Le ss aso eg legleglegl no nc ARS 3 5 CHAPTER 3 THEORY OF OPERATION 1 3 5 Flash ROM A 32Mbit flash RO
7. 94mm interval Printing sample Fig 6 10 2 Turn the drum gear by hand while looking at the surface of the photosensitive drum Fig 6 11 3 Wipe the surface of the photosensitive drum with a cotton swab until the dust or paper powder on the surface comes off Photosensitive drum Fig 6 12 caution e Do not wipe the surface of the photosensitive drum with something sharp ball point pen etc e Use cleaning liquid which is a 50 50 mixture of ethyl alcohol and pure water 6 43 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING l 16 Black spots User Check 1 If the problem is not solved after printing a few pages the drum unit may have glue from label stock on the photosensitive drum surface Refer to Step 1 in the table below and NOTE in the previous page 2 The drum unit may be damaged Install a new drum unit Drum unit failure Drum 2 connection failure 3 4 Fixing unit failure High voltage power supply PCB failure Are the spots at 94mm intervals The problem is not solved after printing a few pages Is the contact between the drum unit and machine connected correctly Are the spots at 79mm intervals The problem is not solved after printing a few pages Is the problem solved after replacing the high voltage power supply PCB 6 44 Ground 1 If toner or glue remains stuck wipe it off gently with a cotton swab Refer to NOTE in the previous page If the
8. 256W x be Q x 4 3 QW MAX 1 8 2W MAX d Fee x 95 45v 1 32 9W MAX FAX SCAN COPY A O 5V R12 TP26 BACK LIGHT 100k __01 TP32 vf TYP 2 4V 18 a i CN3 4 ques 8542 E P39 If MAX S SITTI Geen FSEN A SEN PITCH 12 5mm 5Vx1 05 2 1 180 x 95 SVN 3 E i TP45 4C R43 1 2W 718 4mA MAX Ki 9 Geert 680 1 F F PLN E GREEN 18 4mAx18 4mAx 18 Q x 95 P68 Q5B0W 24V O 24V 74 17 2W MAX TP57 TP59 aN R11 1 4W TP53 TP29 1P8 5V O 5V 1 5k E R17 RB R3 S6B PH K S PITCH 10 Omm 180 180 180 MIN RATING 10uA 1voc B C4081 2012 SOV 15A hFE 120 560 TP46 TP34 TPQ SS 44 DTC143ZUA p FPC Sov 2012 LCD_CONTB 42 O 5V TP19 C16 V e d aM eL D KI a CD CONTA cis KI1 gt 8 ee GND40 2 O SOV Gs SS GEES KI2 B o oi GA Ge von 9 TP Be TP15 KIS gt 38 14 4 E TP1 E KI4 pa E 2 37 KI4 GA C PW Ei TP11 5 S KI6 gt 2 3 35 O 24V Koo 15 34 K O45V 14 O 33 Q K01 D ch cla zu TP67 o gt S S els Koo lt 13 a Wn Spas 5 gees TP65 10 oF 3 K03 lt 12 31 Qu 8 E TP63 e Koa lt 44 E 30 OSOV 00 TP56 100 R15 Kos Z 29 MAIN_SD_IN N TP55 AC kos lt 28 TP58 5C Va cop TP38 3 iliii i i 27 DIS 5 K07 O Sov ANN HOH ro C101 to d d od 26 tpagy P18 1k 100k X V RSTN 5V C Suv E Ld d l EMS ac TP5 TP61
9. This setting will be limited if selector 8 of WSW23 is set to 0 A 19 APPENDIX 3 FIRMWARE SWITCHS WSW WSW14 AUTO ANS facility setting Frequency band selection Lower limit Frequency band selection Upper limit Fixed to once Fixed to 2 times Fixed to 3 times Fixed to 4 times 1 to 2 times 1 to 3 times 1 to 4 times 1 to 5 times 2 to 3 times 2 to 4 times 2 to 5 times 2 to 6 times 1 to 10 times 2 to 10 times 3 to 5 times 4 to 10 times sch eh sch zk OO O OO OO OO OO OO di GO OO OO OH sch eh sch ek CO OO OO OH O OO OO zk zk OO OO ch ck OO Och zk OO N 3 eh 3 eh OH eh OH eh OH eh OH eh OH eh CH 1 2 3 4 5 No of rings in AUTO ANS mode 8 e Selectors 1 through 4 Frequency band selection These selectors are used to select the frequency band of calling signals for activating the AUTO ANS facility In the French versions if the user sets the PBX to OFF from the control panel the setting made by selectors 1 and 2 will take no effect and the frequency s lower limit will be fixed to 32 Hz Even if the setting made by these selectors does not apply it will be printed on the configuration list e Selectors 5 through 8 No of rings in AUTO ANS mode These selectors set the number of rings to initiate the AUTO ANS facility A 20 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL WSW15 REDIAL facility setting 5 minutes Selection of redial interval 1 minute
10. Y Y b Y es drum unit dirty 2 Is the problem solved after es replacing the drum unit Is the problem solved after es Replace the toner replacing the toner cartridge cartridge with a new one Is the connections of the es Replace the high voltage power supply PCB the engine PCB secured correctly mE connector between the high voltage power supply PCB and 5 Are there any disconnected Replace the main connectors PCB Are there any disconnected Replace the engine connectors PCB 6 33 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING l 3 Completely blank v User Check 1 Check for the setting of originals Developing bias 1 Are the developing bias Clean the electrodes contact failure contacts between the machine at both sides body and drum unit dirty Drum unit 2 Are the drum shaft and drum Clean the shaft and electrode of the machine the electrode connected correctly Check the connection between the shaft and the electrode Drum unit failure 3 Is the problem solved after Replace the drum replacing the drum unit unit Scanner 5 Is the scanner harness harness connected securely connection Check if there is any play in failure Main PCB Are printing signals being input failure to the laser unit Is the problem solved after replacing the main PCB the connection Replace the main PCB Laser unit failure 7 Is the scanner interlock lever damaged Replace the laser unit Replace the high voltage p
11. 1 Type Plain paper 60 to 105 g m 16 to 28lb Thick paper 105g m to 1619 m 28 to 43lb MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 10 100 Base TX Ethernet automatic TCP IP RARP BOOTP DHCP APIPA NetBIOS WINS SSDP Rendezvous LPR LPD Port9100 POP3 SMTP SMB IPP FTP TELNET SNMP HTTP TFTP Netware IPX SPX Bindery and NDS Apple Talk DLC LLC Web Based Management HTTPD BRAdmin Professional TCP IP or IPX SPX is used SNMP Brother s original MIB in compliance with MIBII TELNET command console Web BRAdmin Flash ROM base Upgrade using TFTP FTP protocols is available Upgrade using IPX SPX protocols is available Upgrade using the Brother BRAdmin utility is available BRAdmin Professional when using Windows 95 98 Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 XP Port drivers supporting Windows 95 98 Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 LRP port drivers when using Windows 95 98 Me Windows NT 4 0 NetBlOS port drivers when using Windows 95 98 Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 XP SMTP port driver when using Windows 95 98 Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 XP Web BRAdmin Professional Not included in the CD ROM Uploaded to the Web site For more information on Web BRAdmin Professional please access http solutions brother co jp Type Paper tray Manual Lower tray Selection from printer driver Tray 1 feed tray Tray 2 Plain paper or rather thick plain paper Recycled paper Plain paper or r
12. If you want to update the current program stored in the flash ROM of the main PCB to the newer version or after you replace the main PCB install the update program onto the flash ROM The program installation requires a PC AT compatible computer which is capable of running MS DOS or its compatible OS 1 1 Connecting the Machine to Your PC 1 Make sure that your PC is turned off 2 Make sure that the power cord of the machine is unplugged from a wall socket or other power source 3 Connect the parallel interface cable to the parallel port on the back of the machine and secure it with the lock wires 4 Connect the other end of the interface cable to the printer port of your PC and secure it with the two screws 1 2 Setting up the Machine and Your PC 1 Plug the power cord of the machine into a wall socket and turn on the power switch while pressing the 5 key on the machine s control panel 2 Check to see that the following pattern displays on the LCD If it does not display go back to step 2 above 3 Turn on your PC Lock wires 000000 P Parallel ell interface cable PG j Host computer S A 2 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 1 3 Installing the Update Data onto the Flash ROM of the Machine lt On a PC running Windows 95 gt 1 2 Copy the update data and transfer utility onto the desired same directory of the hard disk e g CAUPDATE Click the Start button point to Programs and th
13. LASER DE CLASSE 1 LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT This printer has a laser diode which emits invisible laser radiation in the Laser Unit The Laser Unit should not be opened without disconnecting the two connectors connected with the AC power supply and laser unit Since the variable resistor in the laser unit is adjusted in accordance with the standards never touch it Caution Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure For Finland and Sweden LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT Varoitus Laitteen kaytt minen muulla kuin t ss k ytt ohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa k ytt j n turvallisuusluokan 1 ylitt v lle nakymattomalle lasersateilylle Varning Om apparaten anv nds p annat satt an i denna Bruksanvisning specificerats kan anvandaren uts ttas f r osynlig laserstr lning som verskrider gransen f r laserklass 1 SAFETY INFORMATION SAFETY INFORMATION CAUTION FOR LASER PRODUCT WARNHINWEIS FUR LASER DRUCKER CAUTION When the machine during servicing is operated with the cover open the regulations of VBG 93 and the performance instructions for VBG 93 are valid CAUTION In case of any trouble with the laser unit replace the laser unit itself To prevent direct exposure to the laser beam do not try to open the enclosure of the laser unit ACHTUNG Im Falle von St rungen der Lasereinheit
14. Paper tray 2 Are the ground on the back connection side of the paper tray 1 22 Light rain round Drum unit failure 1 Is the problem solved after Yes Replace the drum replacing the drum unit unit Drum unit 2 Is the contact between the No Clean contact 8 connection drum unit and machine electrode both on the 8 failure connected correctly drum unit and in the Yes machine High voltage 3 Is the problem solved after Replace the high power supply replacing the high voltage voltage power supply PCB failure power supply PCB PCB 6 48 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL User Check 1 Check the paper used meets the recommended paper specifications Damp paper thick media or rough surfaced paper can cause the problem 2 Check the machine s environment High temperature and high humidity conditions can cause the problem 3 Check that the appropriate media type is selected in the printer driver 4 Try installing a new drum unit Driver setting Is thin paper such as 64g m 1 Change the current mode to used under the thick paper the normal mode from the mode driver setting 2 Print 5 or 6 blank pages if this problem occurs Drum unit failure 2 Is the problem solved after Yes Replace the drum unit replacing the drum unit High voltage Is the problem solved after Replace the high voltage power power supply replacing the high voltage supply PCB PCB failure power supply PCB User Check 1 Check the pape
15. 14 transmission of RTN i K 6 7 e Selector1 Starting point of training check TCF At the training phase of receiving operation the called station detects for 1 0 second a training check TCF command a series of zeros which is sent from the calling station for 1 5 seconds to verify training and give the first indication of the acceptability of the line This selector sets the starting point from which the called station should start counting those zeros f this selector is set to 0 the called station starts counting zeros 100 ms after the head of a series of zeros is detected If it is set to 1 the called station starts counting zeros upon detection of 10 ms successive zeros 50 ms after the head of a series of zeros is detected In this case if the detection of 10 ms successive zeros is too late the data counting period will become less than 1 0 second making the called station judge the line condition unacceptable e Selectors 2and 3 Allowable training error rate The called station checks a series of zeros gathered in training as described in Selector 1 according to the allowable training error rate set by these selectors If the called station judges the line condition to be accepted it responds with CFR if not it responds with FTT e Selectors 4 and 5 Decoding error rate for transmission of RTN The machine checks the actual decoding errors and then transmits an RTN according to the decoding error rate Number
16. 2 Disconnect the connector from the control panel ASSY Control panel ASSY Connector Fig 4 26 4 16 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 Remove the cup B M3x6 Taptite screw and then remove the spring plate ADF front 4 Remove the separation rubber rubber holder and rubber holder spring Rubber holder spring oe Taptite cup B M3x6 i Spring plate ADF front Separation rubber Rubber holder Control panel ASSY Fig 4 27 5 Remove the actuator R Control panel ASSY M Actuator R 4 17 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 6 Open the right and left bosses and then remove the document hold ASSY Hooks Document hold ASSY Fig 4 29 7 Remove the three cup B M3x8 Taptite screws 8 Release the three hooks and then remove the paper feed chute Taptite cup B M3x8 Paper feed chute Control panel ASSY Hooks Fig 4 30 4 18 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 9 Remove the actuator F Paper feed chute Actuator F 10 Release the lock of the connector remove the cable from the panel PCB ASSY and then remove the FPC key Cable MEDIE FPC key Panel PCB ASSY Fig 4 32 4 19 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 11 Release the lock and then disconnect the cable of the LCD and the connector of the back light PCB ASSY 12 Remove the two cup B M3x8 Taptite screws and release the two hooks and then remove the panel PCB ASSY S a T SR BNI d SS
17. DATA F 4 ADRI 10 7 40 DATA F 5 ADR 11 6 42 DATA FI6 ADR 12 5 44 DATAFI7 ADAL 13 4 4 9V REGULATOR Aurora Spec 1 88V 08V 1 80 1 95V ADAL 14 3 32 DATA F 9 E ADR 15 2 34 DATA F 10 E O VDO3 ADA 16 1 36 DATA F 11 rh av PONGA ADR 17 48 S EN17 ADAI 18 17 41 _DATA F 13 LL ADR 19 16 43 _DATA F 14 e voo1 8 ADRI20 t all 9 lo pp 45 DATA FAS cli AIR 16v ADR 21 1 loo C195 m R247 C104 ql av o A Pov MSM296B320VP 80 l 4 o v aE Black 6A 6C 3 1E 3 30 4 10 4 5B 4 68 E 5V REGULATOR LVPS B38 EH Aurora WHITE 1 2 3 4 A 5 6 7 8 A 48 Appendix 4 2 Main PCB Circuit Diagram 2 6 5 L PC Printer H Printer PC u19 48 CDCC DIR DIR 28 1 CDCC HD D L Hz evo GND H PP MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL V O U17 ee voos CDCCINITN CDCCACI C123 4 CDCCSINN CDCCBUS 10V 412V COCCHBUS CDCCPE cage lt a v CDCCSTB CDCCSLI ta CDCC_D c122 F VDD1 8 246 29 20 HBUSY_IN e av ev En CDCC D1_ CDCC DIR COCC_DIR INITN_IN 14 N qmgr lIINITN 38 q 4A 21 18 SELINN_IN carau ee COCC D2 VSCANC COCC HD SELINN_IN 15 AS SEI 38 e CDcC D 3 235 4 Oe 2 22 18 INITN_IN Gp N 000 03 oe Cluj HBUSY IN EE EH 16 At ne a 25s EDM za 8 4 1P57 O v 38 5 30 CDCC D 5 Lopes E I R185 100 x 6 z 3 232 202 gt ou 3 O ve CDCC DI
18. It will take a few seconds for the installation screen to appear The installation of the Brother drivers will automatically start Follow the instructions on the screen Select BRUSB USB Printer Port and then click Next Accept the default Printer name by selecting Yes and then click Next PN lt O O OW _ Select Yes recommended and then click Finish A test page will be printed so you can check the print quality 21 Ifthe test page is printed correctly click Yes If you click No follow the prompts on the screen to correct the problem NOTE If the README file shown in step 22 appears close the README WARI file and then click Finish after printing the page 22 The README file will be displayed Please read this file for troubleshooting information and then close the file to continue installation N C2 Check the Run On Line Registration and then click Next N 4 Click Finish to restart your computer TO O1 After the computer restarts click Yes to have the Control Center load each time Windows is started The Control Center will appear as an icon in the task tray If you click No the Scan key on the machine will be disabled NOTE Even if you select NO you will be able to launch the Brother Control Center later to use the Scan key by double clicking the Smart Ul icon on the desktop This loads the Brother Control Center to the task tray See AutoLoad the Brother Control Center Chapter 4
19. The value or alphabet following BR is a product ID 6 19 Check the machine is turned on and the USB interface cable is connected correctly Check that the USB cable used is the shielded twisted pair type and 5 m or less Try to connect the machine and PC with the USB cable directly CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 5 MALFUNCTIONS When taking countermeasures for malfunctions as described in this section check connectors for contact failure before measuring the voltage at the specified connector pins M 1 No AC power supplied Possible cause Supply voltage Is the correct voltage present Inform the user that the at the outlet correct voltage is not supplied at the outlet Power plug Is the power cord securely Plug the power cord securely plugged into the outlet into the outlet Fuse F1 F2 3 Is the fuse blown If the fuse blows again immediately after replacing the low voltage power supply PCB check that there is not a short circuit somewhere in the AC power supply line Wiring Unplug the power supply plug Replace the AC power cord Is there a broken wire between the AC input connector of the low voltage power supply and the power plug M 2 No DC power supplied Step Is AC power supplied between Follow the same check connectors CN1 L and CN1 N procedure of M 1 No AC when the power plug is power supplied plugged into the outlet Wiring DC load 2 Turn on the power switch Turn off the power
20. Windows NT LAN Server TCP IP Troubleshooting If you are having trouble printing with Windows NT or LAN Server check the following 1 Make sure that TCP IP and TCP IP print service are installed and running on the Windows NT system or the LAN Server file server 2 If you are using DHCP and you have not created a reservation for the print fax server make sure that you enter the NetBIOS name of the print fax server in the Name or address of server providing Ipd box Windows 95 98 Me Peer to Peer Print LPR Troubleshooting If you are having trouble printing on a Windows 95 98 Me Peer to Peer network LPR method check the following 1 Make sure that the Brother LPR Port driver is correctly installed and configured according to the Windows 95 98 Me Peer to Peer chapters 2 Try to turn the Byte Count on in the Configure port area of printer driver properties You may find that during the installation of BLP software the screen that prompts you for a Port name is not displayed This may happen on some Windows 95 98 Me computers Press the ALT and TAB keys to make it appear Windows 95 98 Me Peer to Peer HP JetAdmin Compatible Method Troubleshooting If you are having trouble printing on a Windows 95 98 Me Peer to Peer network check the following HP JetAdmin compatible method 1 If the print fax server does not show up under JetAdmin on a Windows 95 98 Peer to Peer network try removing all of the Windows 95
21. orotner SERVICE MANUAL MODEL MFC 8220 Read this manual thoroughly before maintenance work Keep this manual in a convenient place for quick and easy reference at all times Copyright Brother Industries Ltd 2004 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form or by any means without permission in writing from the publisher Specifications are subject to change without notice Trademarks The brother logo is a registered trademark of Brother Industries Ltd Apple the Apple Logo and Macintosh are trademarks registered in the United States and other countries and TrueType is a trademark of Apple computer Inc Microsoft and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and other countries MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL PREFACE This publication is a Service Manual covering the specifications construction theory of operation and maintenance of the Brother machine It includes information required for field troubleshooting and repair disassembly reassembly and lubrication so that service personnel will be able to understand machine function to rapidly repair the machine and order any necessary spare parts To perform appropriate maintenance so that the machine is always in best condition for the customer the service personnel must adequately understand and apply this manual This manual is made up
22. 1 2 3 Check the machine is turned on Check the USB interface cable is connected correctly Check the printer driver is installed correctly Machine connection Select Apple System Profiler in Apple Menu Are the following items indicated in the USB box of the Device and Volumes tab e Product ID 0x16 e Vender Brother International Corporation or Ox4f9 Driver installation Are there the following files in the Extensions Folder of System Folder For System 8 6 or higher e BR PrintMoniter USB e Brother Laser i i M Mi Check the machine is turned on and the USB interface cable is connected correctly Check that the USB cable used is the shielded twisted pair type and 5 m or less Try to connect the machine and PC with the USB cable directly Try to re install the printer driver Turn off the machine and PC power switch and check all connections between them Then turn them on again S 4 This machine does not appear in Chooser with Mac and Power Macintosh G3 G4 with USB v User Check 1 2 3 Check the machine is turned on Check the USB interface cable is connected correctly Check the printer driver is installed correctly Machine connection Select Apple System Profiler in Apple Menu Are the following items indicated in the USB box of the Device and Volumes tab e Product ID 0x18 e Vender Brother International Corporation or Ox4f9 NOTE
23. 1 Sn Ag Cu Nihon Japan DHB RMA3 Genma NP303 only Sn Ag Cu Nihon Japan DHB RMA3 Component Genma NP303 side We use wire solder which is indicated by digit after LF indication on PCB Wire solder made in the contries except Japan are under investigation and will be evaluated 3 Appearance quality criteria The appearance of the surface of portions soldered with lead free solder is basically the same as that for those soldered with conventional lead tin solder except for the following points 1 The surface of a portion soldered with lead free solder is dull and not smooth 2 Shrinkage cracks can be observed on the surface of a portion soldered with lead free solder They can be observed using a magnifying glass with approx 10x magnification Figure 1 Shrinkage Cracks 4 Identification of lead free solder on PCBs For PCBs that use lead free solder LF is indicated by silk screen printing or attaching a label LF stands for lead free and indicates that the PCBs bearing such an indication have been soldered with lead free solder A digit is given in a box following LF if produced by silk screen printing or follows LF without a box on an attached label the digit indicating the metal composition and wire solder 4 66 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 5 Precautions for hand soldering operations 1 Soldering operations using lead free solder are basically the same as those using tin lead solder however due to the lead
24. 2 18 3 Connect one end of the telephone line cord to the jack on the machine marked LINE and the other end to a modular wall jack Fig 2 19 MJ cover is only equipped for Europe spec The machine must be grounded using a 3 prong plug Since the machine is grounded through the power outlet you can protect yourself from potentially hazardous electrical conditions on the telephone network by keeping the power to your machine on when you connect it to a telephone line Similarly you can protect yourself when you want to move your machine by disconnecting the telephone line first and then the power cord CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND BASIC OPERATION NOTE If you are sharing one phone line with an external telephone connect it as shown below Fig 2 20 NOTE If you are sharing one phone line with an external telephone answering device connect it as shown below Please set the receive mode to External TAD For more details see Connecting the MFC in Chapter 1 of the User s Guide Fig 2 21 3 2 3 2 1 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL Installing the Driver amp Software For USB Interface Cable Users For Windows 98 98SE Me 2000 Professional XP 1 2 Switch off and unplug the machine from the AC outlet and disconnect it from your computer if you already connected an interface cable Turn on your computer For Windows 2000 Professional XP you must be logged on as the administrator
25. 2 minutes 3 minutes 1 1 1 1 Redialing for no response sent 0 Rediali ME from the called terminal eeu Sube eet CRP option O Disable 1 Enable e Selectors 1 through 6 Selection of redial interval and No of redialings 1 2 16 times 3 1 times No of redialings 2 times 6 3 times 15times The machine redials by the number of times set by selectors 3 through 6 at intervals set by selectors 1 and 2 This setting is effective only when selector 7 is set to 0 e Selectors 7 Redialing for no response sent from the called terminal This selector determines whether or not the machine redials if no G3 command response comes from the called station after dialing within the time length set by selectors 7 and 8 of WSWO9 e Selectors 8 CRP option If a command error occurs in the equipment calling station the equipment usually waits for three seconds and then makes a retry three times This CRP option is a request command that can be sent from the called station for requesting the calling station to retry the failed command immediately A 21 APPENDIX 3 FIRMWARE SWITCHS WSW WSW16 Function setting 1 NICHO TT E 3 I Not used Max document length limitation 0 400 cm 1 90 cm Stop Exit button pressed during 0 Not functional 1 Functional reception e Selector 2 CCITT superfine recommendation If this selector is set to 1 the machine communicates in CCITT recommended superfine
26. 32 44 DATA SI9 ADRI 10 33 45 DATA SI10 ADRI 41 34 47 DATA S 11 ADR 12 22 48 DATA S 12 ADR 13 35 50 DATA S 13 ADR 14 R130 36 51 DATA S 14 0 40 TP3 3 36PIN 128Dit FHM 6A 6F 3 1E 3 30 4 10 4 58 4 NN O B 25 9 M Fig 3 8 3 6 1 3 7 Optional RAM A 32bit 100 pin DIMM can be fitted as optional RAM The main PCB has one slot and the capacity of DIMM can be from 16MB to 128MB Dal 15 2 6D DIMM CN13 DQ ra ARR n Sar s 3006 223007 Natr E DG 10 dolo palo SENA Lt leste so 46 0023 1 5C Note AN A Ste Root pal 12 SR eee Te ADA 17 gt DAN y Q D 1 6A 1 6C 1 6F 1 7A eege CASN a de D EE Kale y y DG30 1 6A 1 6C 1 6F 1 7A 1E 4 1C 4 4 68 T e SDCLK 41 1 4C SDCLK2 SIDA 48 SKSDA 1 4C SOSCL 435 SCL ADR 291 DGMO 1 50 1 6A 1 6C 1 6F 1 7M AE 41 4 S A E DOM4 B gt sag 1 6A 1 6C 1 6F 1 78 1E 4 1C P 5 468 Dve a SE V O UU S SA2 SDCSN1 eJ gt SNO RASNO EO sse LLY SN1 RASN1 E41 1 64 1 60 1 65 1 78 1E 4 10 4 RA ADR 15 1 6A 1 6C 1 6F 1 7B8 1E 4 1C 4 1 84 1 80 1 8F 30 4 10 4 58 4 68 e 1 38 EEPROM 4 68 16 BA1 4 68 BA ADRI 14 ADRI10 ADRI8 ADAI6 ADR 4 Q lt gl n I gt BA1 A12 BL BAQ A11 25 A13 NotUse A15 gt A12 NotUse A14 695 A11 A13 B gt A10 AP A10 A9 AB 2 A7 Da AG Ha AS Ad d A3 gt A2 A1 A vDD3 C147 C148 C194 C189 c188 C170 C169 C120 C119 V C1 3 C103 C103 C103 C103 C
27. 6 58 10 12 10 13 10 14 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL AppleTalk Troubleshooting In case of using Postscript driver if you cannot print from an AppleTalk for Macintosh computer and you have checked the hardware and network as described in the previous steps then check the following 1 Make sure that you are running Phase 2 AppleTalk and that you have selected the correct network interface from the Apple Talk Control Panel on the Macintosh Y Make sure that the AppleTalk protocol of the print fax server is enabled E If you have a large network make sure that you have the Laser Writer V8 xx or equivalent driver since earlier versions may cause PostScript errors Also verify that you get the correct printer information when you select Printer Info from the Setup button in the Chooser 4 Make sure that you have selected the correct Printer Description File PPD from the Chooser otherwise PostScript errors may result b Verify that you have selected the correct AppleTalk zone Because the print fax server gets its zone information from router broadcasts it may not be in the zone you expect and will therefore not show up in the Chooser If this is the case you may need to force the zone name using BRAdmin Professional utility a web browser DLC LLC Troubleshooting If you are having trouble printing with DLC LLC check the following 1 Make sure that the DLC LLC protocol is enabled using either BRAdmin Professio
28. Fig 4 3 3 Remove the pad holder and the separation pad spring from the paper tray Pad holder E Separation pad spring S Paper tray S gt N SC E Fig 4 4 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL NOTE When replacing re assembling the pad holder ZL2 ASSY remove the old grease and apply a suitable amount of grease referring to the figure below Paper pick up roller Grease Molykote PG 662 N y Paper tray 4 mm dia ball NY N e Ei S my N P R SS N Sy MA BER ENNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNS AA p KY Fig 4 5 4 Remove the four bind B M4x12 Taptite screws and then remove the paper tray front cover Paper tray Taptite bind B M4x12 Hook Taptite bind B M4x12 Paper tray front cover Fig 4 6 4 5 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 5 Remove the two cup B M3x10 Taptite screws and then remove the paper tray cover Paper tray gt Taptite cup a B M3x10 VIN tray cover Taptite cup B M3x10 Fig 4 7 6 Remove the pressure roller holder ASSY Pressure roller holder ASSY Paper tray Flat screwdriver Fig 4 8 4 6 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 7 Remove the pressure roller collar 8 Remove the pressure roller shaft Pressure roller shaft Pressure roller collar Pressure roller holder ASSY Fig 4 9 9 Remove the scratch spongy holder ASSY from the pressure roller holder ASSY 10 Remove the two scratch spongy springs 11 Remove the scratch
29. K uva 2 6 v u m T VL HL e iv Q PEER AER SEE Deum YL O o lt N N Q lt kel wm lt z X o 2 D o o x z o s o I o k a w n o A U U v v vu Uu OS O2 Ox OZ Ox Ox R001 D o o N R101 D103 R103 d K P IN JIYA a St w a 9t tino vos ZINZANI WIT ANI SIEY 6 EY OTEY TTEY ZIEY ELEY LIEY O O O gt s 2 SS lt S z o A 60 Oz ADZ Td T LL MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL Appendix 4 14 High voltage Power Supply PCB Circuit Diagram 200V CN1 2 VCC24V O 6 CHG O O 10 VERSION 1 GND24 O 5 PWM DEV O 3 GRIDC O 4 VCLN O 9 TRCC O 8 PWM TRCC O 7 TROV O R1 H a dr lo iD a DET EN k R216 C204 Z101 R74 VR101 c102 0105 RB1ib bs ss R261 R263 R262 R265 O I 0 DEV cea O vCLN A 61 APPENDIX 4 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Appendix 4 15 Back Light PCB Circuit Diagram 6 FSEN Vf MIN 2 1 V S S X er If MAX al a 5 Vx1 5 1 0V 240 2 x 95 is DE 18 7mA MAX IC 1B 7mAx18 7mAx 120x0 95 399W REG FRONT 1 25W MAX 120 TNNT C SS BAC USA GREEN U V Y TLGU1002A RED TLSU1002A N RED 4 GREEN 24V 3 24V T5V O S V O 2 V 1 5V February 04 SM FAX026 8X5913 Printed in Japan
30. Maintenance mode 11 lt Function gt MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL The machine prints out the setting items and contents specified by the firmware switches lt Operating Procedure gt 1 The PRINTING will appear on the LCD mode CONFIGURATION LIST Press the 1 key twice in the initial stage of the maintenance mode The machine prints out the configuration list as shown in the figure below Upon completion of printing the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance 8x5 913 41 68 2005 19 36 cr EEE 3D84 UUD021000058 WSW25 00811610 NOT USED TIME BETWEEN PAGING NUMBERS NOT USED 40418168 NOT USED DIALING BEFORE SCANNING DONE EXT CNG DETECTION INT CNG DETECTION NOT USED DI OD HOT USED RINGER OFF SELECT NOT USED D R TIMES ONLY NOT USED 94000086 DTMF HIGH FREG LEVEL ADJUST DTMF LOW FREG LEVEL ADJUST NOT LISED 1148188 NOT USED 1900900 NOT USED HEATER CONTROL FOR FLICKER CLEAN DRUM DISPLAY NOT USED 1910610 NOT USED REDUCTION LIMIT NOT USED D R CHATTERING NOT LISED CHANGE DRUM DISPLAY 810140088 NOT USED HOME POLLED RESOLUTION HOME POLLED CONTRAST 10044414 NOT USED POLLED REPORT NOT USED 80015400 NOT USED DTMF DIGIT FOR CNG DETECTION NOT USED Blmnamnmng NOT LIGED DHDDDDDR ECP MODE ON DATA RX PG POWER OFF PECOVER YES STROBE PC POWER OFF TIME gt NORMAL NOT USED MOVING TO PHASE C BY RTC t YES IG
31. O a Fig 4 40 4 23 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 9 Remove the ejection roller B4 from the ejection pinch roller Ejection pinch roller V S Sy FV Ejection roller B4 Fig 4 41 10 Remove the pan S P washer M3x6 screw 11 Release the hook by rotating the scanning motor and then remove the scanning motor Screw pan S P washer M3x6 Hook Scanning motor Fig 4 42 4 24 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 12 Release the hook and then remove the two document separation roller Document separation roller SO Fig 4 43 13 Remove the LF ground spring LF ground spring Fig 4 44 4 25 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 3 8 Outer Chute 1 Remove the outer chute Hook Outer Chute Fig 4 45 2 Remove the outer chute tray Outer Chute Outer chute tray Fig 4 46 3 9 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL Rear Cover L R 1 Remove the two bind B M4x12 Taptite screws and then remove the rear cover L 2 Remove the two bind B M4x12 Taptite screws and then remove the rear cover R Taptite bind B M4x12 Rear cover R Taptite bind B o i M4x 12 Taptite bind B M4x12 Rear cover L 4 27 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 3 10 Side Cover L R 1 Remove the three bind B M4x12 Taptite screws and then remove the side cover R Taptite bind B M4x12 j Side cover R Taptite bind B M4x12 Taptite bind B M
32. Remove the pan B M3x8 Taptite screw and then remove the tray lock lever 23 Release the four hooks to remove the paper tray rear from the paper tray Taptite pan B M3x8 Tray lock lever NE Paper tray rear 1 Hook MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 24 Remove the paper rear guide Paper tray E lt e pr FDA E 2 v 3 4 Rear Cover C 1 Remove the bind B M4x12 Taptite screw and then remove the rear cover C Rear cover C wa Z2 S A pS Taptite bind B M4x12 Fig 4 21 4 13 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 3 5 Access Cover Battery ASSY 1 Remove the access cover 2 Loosen the two access plate screws 3 Remove the access plate Access plate screw Access cover Hooks Access plate Access plate screw Hooks Fig 4 22 4 Disconnect the connector of the battery ASSY Main PCB ASSY Lf x Access plate K N TE 4 x dy If Battery ASSY Fig 4 23 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 5 Cut the binding band which secures the battery ASSY to the access plate and then remove the battery ASSY T No Binding band Battery ASSY Access plate Fig 4 24 4 15 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 3 6 Control Panel ASSY 1 Remove the two pins and then remove the control panel ASSY Control panel ASSY Pin Pin Y H E Di T d H ZC A A 4 SES SS N Ke Fig 4 25
33. This function much like the copying function prints out test pattern 1 to allow the service personnel to check for record data missing or print quality lt Operating Procedure gt Press the 0 and 9 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode The figure below shows test pattern 1 GELLI L LLLLLLILIITIITIIITIIIIITIITTITTTTTTTITITTITLTILLLLLLLLLLLLLILIILILLILLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLIILILILLLLITIIIIIITI OOO LILA AAA E EA AAA AAA AAA 1 CN KM AE i D L Y L i L Fig 7 3 7 8 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 5 Firmware Switch Setting and Printout 3 5 1 Firmware switch setting Maintenance mode 10 lt Function gt The machine incorporates the following firmware switch functions which may be activated with the procedures using the control panel keys and buttons The firmware switches have been set at the factory in conformity to the communications standards and codes of each country Do not disturb them unless necessary Some firmware switches may not be applicable in some versions The firmware switch data list indicates Not used for those inapplicable switches Firmware Switches WSWO01 through WSW50 7 9 CHAPTER 7 MAINTENANCE MODE lt Operating Procedure gt 1 Pres
34. User Check 1 If the problem is not solved after printing a few pages the drum unit may have glue from label stock on the photosensitive drum surface Refer to Step 1 in the table below and NOTE in the next page 2 The drum unit may be damaged Install a new drum unit Drum unit failure 1 Are the white spot at 94mm 1 If toner or glue remains intervals stuck wipe it off gently with a cotton swab Refer to NOTE in the next page 2 If the drum surface is scratched replace the drum unit Drum unit failure 2 Is the problem solved after Replace the drum unit replacing the drum unit Toner empty 3 Is the toner in the toner Replace the toner cartridge with cartridge almost empty a new one Paper 4 Is the problem solved after Yes Damp wet paper might be changing to specified freshly used Recommend to change unpacked paper freshly unpacked paper Environment 5 Does the problem still appear Y 1 Replace the drum unit after the machine has warmed 2 Advise the user of the up specified print environment Yes Yes Yes es 6 42 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL NOTE Clean the drum unit as follows 1 Remove the toner cartridge from the drum unit Place the printing samples in front of the drum unit and find the exact position of the image defect Drum unit di 4 Position of smudge on the drum y
35. Yes Yes Yes S Dirt in the paper Is the paper tray or feed Yes Clean the toner off Yes Yes Yes 3 5 feed system system on the drum unit dirty with toner Scratch on the Is the drum surface scratched Replace the drum unit drum Dirt on the drum 7 Is the drum surface dirty with Replace the drum unit toner in streaks Scratch on the Is the surface of the heat roller Replace the fixing unit heat roller scratched NOTE e Ifyou print the same pattern continuously the drum will be worn and black vertical streaks will appear on the paper e his problem may occur with noise due to the corona wire being dirty In that case clean the corona wire with the wire cleaner 6 37 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING l 7 Black and blurred horizontal stripes User Check 1 The drum unit may be damaged Install a new drum unit 2 8 Check the paper used meets the recommended paper specifications Clean the machine interior and the corona wire in the drum unit contacts Scratch on the Are the horizontal stripes at The photosensitive drum 94mm photosensitive drum drum was scratched intervals Replace the drum Toner stuck on Are the horizontal stripes at After printing several the development 39mm development roller pages the problem roller intervals will disappear If not replace the toner cartridge Scratch on the 3 Are the horizontal stripes at Yes Replace the heat heat roller 79mm heat roller
36. e MFL Pro Suite includes Printer Driver Scanner Driver ScanSoft PaperPorf ScanSoft Text Bridge PC FAX software Remote Setup and True Type fonts PaperPorf is a document management application for viewing scanned documents e ScanSoff TextBridge which is integrated into PaperPort is an OCR application that converts an image into text and inserts it into your default word processor Click Install NOTE e f you see the following screen click OK to install the Windows updates After the updates are installed your PC may restart e If it does the installation will automatically continue e Ifthe installation does not continue automatically please open the installer menu again by double clicking the setup exe program from the root directory of the Brother CD ROM and continue from step 4 When the PaperPort 8 0 SE Setup window is displayed click Next After reading and accepting the ScanSoft License Agreement enter your user information and click Next Select Typical and click Next Click Install and PaperPort will start installing on your computer When the PaperPort 8 0 SE Registration screen is displayed make your selection and follow the on screen instructions Click Finish to complete installation When the Brother MFL Pro Suite Installation window appears click Next NOTE If an error message appears at this point in the installation process or if you have previously installed the MFL
37. intervals roller Dirt on the Are the charge electrodes Clean both electrodes charge between the machine and the 3 electrodes drum unit dirty High voltage Is the problem solved after Replace the high power supply replacing the high voltage voltage power supply PCB failure power supply PCB PCB Black vertical streaks in a gray background Translucent Is there any dirt on the scanner Clean the scanner stain on the window Pai scanner window 2 If it is not effective replace the laser unit Corona wire 2 Is the corona wire dirty Yes Clean the corona wire 2 failure with the wire cleaner 6 38 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL White vertical streaks User Check 1 Try to wipe the scanner window with a soft cloth 1 2 The toner cartridge may be damaged Install a new toner cartridge S 3 Check the machine s environment High temperature and high humidity conditions can cause this problem 4 Damp wet paper might be used Try to change to freshly unpacked paper Dirt on the CIS Is there any dirt on that Replace the CIS Dirt on the white Is there any dirt on that Clean the white tape tape Transfer failure Is the transfer roller scratched Replace the drum unit Condensation 4 Has condensation occurred Try to print several pages or inside the machine leave the machine 2 hours to allow it to reach room temperature l 10 White horizontal stripes User Check 1 Check
38. make sure that the machine is not forced into PostScript mode Intermittent Problem If the print fax server and machine start up OK but you intermittently have problems printing check the following 1 2 If you can print small jobs but large graphics jobs are distorted or incomplete make sure that you have adequate memory in your machine and the latest printer driver installed on your computer The latest Brother printer drivers can be downloaded from http solutions brother com Check the individual protocol troubleshooting sections in this chapter for additional causes of intermittent machine problems 6 54 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 10 3 TCP IP Troubleshooting 10 4 If you are using TCP IP and cannot print to the print server and you have checked the hardware and network as described in the previous steps then check the following NOTE It is always a good idea to try the following in order to eliminate the possibility of setup errors e Turning off the machine and then on again e Deleting and recreating the print fax server and creating a new print queue in order to eliminate the possibility of setup errors 1 The problem may be the result of mismatched or duplicate IP address Verify that the IP address is correctly loaded into the print fax server via the configuration page Make sure that no other nodes on the network have this address DUPLICATE IP ADDRESS ARE THE BIGGEST CAUSE OF TCP IP PRINTING PROBL
39. the paper is curled you should straighten it before printing Sometimes it is helpful to remove the paper turn the stack over and put it back in the paper tray Reduce the amount of paper in the paper tray and then try again Check that manual feed tray is not selected in the printer driver Re insert the paper firmly one sheet at a time Make sure that manual feed tray is selected in the printer driver The machine can feed envelopes from the manual feed tray Your application software must be set up correctly to print on the envelope size you are using This is usually done in the page setup or document setup menu of your software Please see your software application manual e Clear the jammed paper Please refer to QSG e Close the back output tray e Check if the lower tray is correctly connected to the machine Check if an appropriate tray is selected by the printer driver Check the sensors by using the maintenance mode function code 32 Refer to Chapter 7 Subsection 3 9 Check the document front sensor actuator and document rear sensor actuator Check the main PCB Check the ADF and its related sections Check the ADF motor and its harness Check the document feed roller and its related gears Check the main PCB e Check the ADF parts e Check the ADF motor 6 10 3 2 3 2 1 3 3 3 3 1 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL Original Jams Based upon where the original or printed sheet is jammed fo
40. 1 46 HEATER CMPOU e Ces Ces 57 exar SCANER MOTOR DRIVE C104 guest PAS pai 3 3V DRIVE T T er V OFF GND GND O F GND SCAN LOOKN ANALOG 10 LVPS FAN24V TM 9 3 SCANER MOTOR LOCK j vec3 nee 3 3V UNLOCKED BSB PH K S lr j 100 OV LOOKED c48 i l R83 C101 i Ziel EMI GND d GND j SCAN OK 0 1 00 16k 48k 4 c58 COMPARATOR hysteresis reset Lie C103 vec3 NORMAL SRT y LVPS FAN12V i SE e rus 1 HARD LIMIT TEMP C i mens 18V io E HEATERHOEEN C THM POTENT 5 i Sou gt 10k O GND SE vec3 vCC3 RADIAL Pitch 5 to LT SOL and M FAN C 1 0 1 0 1 0 OCN9 vece4 O ONL e SOL VOC24 SOV 1 5A Reo DC MOT FOR SAFETY STANDAFD RED c56 y c1e3 i CN12 Kj EMI REG SOL TONERCMP PHM DO MOTOR LOCK M 484v 3 3V UNLOCKED ig V LOCKED 0 5 R27 G13 EL c18 DC MOTOR 1b 3 ma D1764K HJ cre B2B PHK S SN ed FEG S0L c a Di CN16 SES BLACK R28 GND T1 SOL 5 10k BLUE E C C1004 SFG35VB 100MFC O MYA j KE DBxL9 d GND GND Pitch F 3 5 0 5 i rien og EX GNO m 40m 7 TS ca7 E Bod 014 pizeik C102 Bee PHHCE Tan ae An B TP EMI 1 5C e 0CN13 R26 GND DX SOL FRAME GROUND 10k PINK twv sy ES 9 5 o DX SOL 220mA on29 0Q12 D c19 Se T 29 820 q cuo A PARTS SIDE VIEW E uiu i EMI ires 3216 M 32v BA E d E GND GND gd 0 5 e FG3 SOLDER 400mA 2 SIDE esi ecd aN Ib 2 7mA D1781K ceo d MP S0L a Ge
41. 3 087320 616 Taptite cup S M3x6 Driver PCB shield 0 686 0 098 7 1 Joint cover ASSY 4 4 085412 216 Taptite bind B M4x12 0 784 0 098 8 1 Rercwrl 2 e 09711016 Tapine cup B Maxto HShoder 2 0 588 40 098 6 21 _ Document Scanner Parts code Parts name Location Tightening E N m Kgf cm RE a Document scanner 087311 016 cup M3x10 Document chute ASSY 0 588 0 098 6 1 Panel Parts code Parts name Location Pcs Tightening torque N m Kgf cm Panel PCB ASSY 2 1 087310 815 Taptite cup B M3x8 0 588 0 098 6 1 Panel rear cover 8 087310 615 Taptite cup B M3x6 Spring plate front 0 392 0 098 4 1 4 69 Gear 20 center F R PG4 Flame L PG4 N 2 a N Sod S 2 lt e S S E LO E Q O e E N lo Y 3 Et x Slc E E dg c O alistl o dl o O A Olo amp o O y o st O A 7 ZZ S LU Ge k GR SS VAT i r gm EN E WERK lt A dL IN i il q Pendulum gear 22 PG4 PG4 PG4 Gear 58 88 Idle gear 16A PG4 Drive unit EA Ee LL LEM k ZA ZAS CC gt E LA PG4 Idle gear 16A PG4 PG4 Grease PG662 4 mm dia ball Shaft idle gear 16 4 70 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y LUBRICATION 7 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 8 HARNESS ROUTING 1 Toner sensor PCB 2 Fan motor 60 unit Toner sensor PCB Fan motor 60 unit
42. 4 Paper Feeding Problems Even if the paper is printed and ejected without any problems such as paper jams paper feeding problems below may appear Users can clear these problems by following the User Check items for each problem Even if the same problem occurs again follow the procedures in the table below F 1 Double feeding User Check Check the paper used meets the recommended paper specifications Possible cause Result oeparation pad 1 Is the surface of the separation Yes Replace the separation pad pad worn out User Check 1 Check that paper is loaded into the paper tray correctly 2 3 4 Turn over the stack of paper in the cassette or try rotating the paper 180 in the cassette Check the paper used meets the recommended paper specifications 1 2 3 Try printing using the straight through output path 4 Paper 1 Is the problem solved if new Yes Instruct the user how to store paper is used paper so that it does not absorb moisture Fixing unit 2 Is the entrance guide dirty Yes Clean the entrance guide entrance guide Fixing unit 3 Is the pressure roller dirty Clean the pressure roller Replace the fixing unit User Check 1 Check that the paper or other media is loaded into the paper tray correctly and that the paper guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack 2 If using the manual feed tray check how to load paper into the manual feed tray correctly 3
43. 48 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 19 High voltage PS PCB ASSY 1 Remove the bind B M4x12 Taptite screw and then remove the high voltage PS PCB ASSY 2 Disconnect the flat cable from the high voltage PS PCB ASSY High voltage PS PCB ASSY Flat cable Fig 4 89 3 20 Low voltage PS PCB ASSY 1 Remove the bind B M4x12 Taptite screw 2 Disconnect the three connectors from the low voltage PS PCB and then remove the low voltage PS PCB ASSY Low voltage PS PCB ASSY Taptite bind B M4x12 Heater connector Main PCB Engine PCB connector Main PCB connector 4 49 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 3 Remove the two bind B M4x12 Taptite screws and then remove the inlet holder 4 Remove the bind B M4x12 Taptite screw and then remove the SW holder 5 Remove the fan motor 60 unit 6 Remove the low voltage PS PCB Low voltage PS PCB Inlet Inlet holder Taptite bind B M4x12 CN SW holder a Taptite bind B M4x12 Fig 4 91 Hint Inlet Harness Installation Procedure 1 Mount the inlet 2 Mount the fan motor 60 unit 3 Pull the inlet harness behind the fan motor 60 unit to the side of the SW holder to take up the slack Important 4 Mount the SW holder 4 50 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 21 Paper Feeder 1 Remove the bush R 2 Remove the paper pick up roller ASSY 3 Remove the two roller collars from the paper pick up roller ASSY Roller collar
44. 8096 12096 15096 es AT WSW50 selector Function No Seting and Specifications Seting and Specifications Specifications pee A 47 APPENDIX 4 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Appendix 4 1 Main PCB Circuit Diagram 1 6 ADR 23 1 BS a 30 4 10 4 58 4 68 74 78 3 1D DATA H Bi36 AAA 10K TT i DATA 1 aj 42 17 DATA 2 A E 54 80 68 3 18 9 30 4 10 458 4 68 1 H 5 BA B0 EF 2 1E 3 20 4 10 450 45 APIS BA EC EF 3 1E 3 30 4 10 4 3 465 mte e 2 F Lamm JE ED 353 T GA EC EF 3 1E 3 3C 4 4 ae ES s Amia GA EC GF 3 1 3 3c 4 1 58 4 66 BT ApRI9 parate 2 CC ee sou g OH SO ss BET soen E Sp s uur 8 55 PaCS let ARUSI SE H i SCH PE Ser AE DATA 13 ADAL 14 B 4 171 BA 60 6F 3 10 3 1E 4 10 4 DEJA E C173 C476 C178 C463 C15 C142 C435 C134 C133 C145 C157 C166 a Gegen 57 CTT i i P lis DATA 15 58 29 II ADR 16 ov v 59 30 rg _ ADR 17 C103 C103 C103 C103 C103 C103 Sis di m lis 2 DATA S I C103 C103 C103 C103 C403 t 7C103 DATAL 15 0 MOM CEN e E17 33 Sg A Su mE ga f t 3 DATA S 1 de E dese Dm er a DEE ami C471 C472 C475 C477 C467 C459 C453 C446 C440 us lt 0 72 Sen ADR 2 el 5 _ oatasial SE DR 3 24 7 oatasial LAN INTN e gt ee m l ADRIA 25 8 DATA SI4 o v 470 y 1P2026 54 35 R222 33 A C103 C103 C1
45. ADR 7 e R117 51 P w A 65 A9 4 o M 6 2 El M0 ie 173 1E 3 30 10 68 1 74 1 78 3 10 64 6 18 El BS A44 GE A GIE HM GE 275 hae DATA F PP L 285 17 DATA_SIO S DATA ST1 38 ony DATA_ST2I E mas a 403 4 DATA SISI 4 me DATA SIS 43 6h EDU 24 507 e PL NT IT SO 49 08 DATA SIS 50 DATA S 10 Sg e DATA ST11 DATA ST 12 Sege SC DATA S 14 SCH WEE Sis DATA_S 15 0 1 8C 3 6E 6 38 I Si mpe 2 LAN RSTN gt VVV AN RS C K3N6V10000 ee Raa mul C 100 i D 123741 PO HS UA E TOPON ESA K la TOMEN gt 4071707147615 gt IOWAN LAN CSN FA LAN_CSN DATA F 45 0 TP3044 1 7F 3 68 de LAN ININ 9 AY 60 LAN TI 100 R97 64M is TP1110 e y L E D A Lee tu TP4107 B A21 NC NC NC lee NC IPORT PA WB acc me acc Nc Iw Nc NC LAN DREON 7 PORT Rv BY RY BY AY BY RY Y Nc Nc TP311 WR TP1108 Y Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte TP1109 LAN DACKN E DACKN v0030 3 3V gu ER 3 3V 3 3V Ms Daa 3V Liss 45 gt 43 3V AIM OZ gt 43 3V 20 43 3V GND GND c56 alg af GND E tL Ojo NIG GND E DAI RB Ffm T o 24 an FB495D 5xL5 SE 9 OVDD3B R145 oli S S us 36 END TO SORAM ATC ax SP 1519 5 ONO HF 48 END VOLTAGE DET IC aos 59 a te s A A A A cea R1130H3318 Ca ovo 5 16V Ci00 C104 SD BKUPN z FE3 16V101M F R120 avo 5xL11 10k xaX S 80B42CNWC B83 9v 0 0 OUTPUT DFJ RC9G0 S931124D BLM11B1 2SPB B28 PH K E CR Blue NiMH BATTERY 3CELL 3 F 3V BACK UP 1 2 3 4 A 5 6 7 8
46. Bac BA103240F TP129 ue Auen Ar EIS O TP97 2125 Ziel E 0 5 11 i Dez TPS AREF l m MOV 4 7K sn mss O P3080 VDD24 Mov y 5 st EEN warte cx al cm c23 ai Sepa ae sev 2012 ANALOG SW C M V 16pin TSSOP ovd E C40 _ co T cma C tev crow 74 MOV EYExY A TP 100 nes a 3 LE damus oe 23 i 47 0 25 M_STROBE E TP1 7 TP143 ako M CLKII TP108 A M TXSI TPi09 SALIO M CNTRL SII TP11 wer FD74LV4053AT a SPAI as TP111 MSV 0 25 R33 rae 0 25 C104 56 S1eel H 2 7k Te l Fair IA SLEEP TP112 TP125 R39 1p130 I 8t 1 75k i H 14 croa Mk NCU RING e VW t a SPKALIN pak ER H AC 4EVTA 350 PORO TP113 ties PES ia i gg EF ALSDO Meel NCU FNG P 2 j SH TEL VOL2 75 mu TP 102 TP128 M VO lov CTSO P103 i HD74LV4053AT c18 c221 RXD TP1 4 i DSAO 47P105 i MAVOD OMSV H d C104 i geen c33 C17 R22 MAVSS OM V i C104 TP140 4 7k TP142 38 DD38 O VDD5 el al C54 C44 EN caa C104 GG O v0D5 v cea L oa av 13 VOD1 1 t VDD3 C31 16 C104 VSS16 O v vont vs 057 C104 SS5 ogv VOD1 6 1 VDD3 69 VOD1 69 C59 C58 C104 65 C104 EP d 16V C102 UVR1C100MAA1FA 84 vs vOD1 um O 5xL11 e C104 VSs80 Oev ge vDD1 92 O VDD3 c42 99 C104 ssi SS oov 62 CORE O VDD3 52 SUB OM V HF O o Vo PP b O O EP Hiere 56k 1 F 1608 R48 vee C15 B 2k C104 4 F 0 25 TP448 TP151 TP152 T BA10324AF VDD24 O 11 Q1 10k Tage c1 MOV
47. Frame length selection 0 2560ctets 1 64 octets Use of non standard commands 0 Allowed 1 Prohibited 4 times No of retries times 2 times 1time i de i No Elapsed time for time out 60sec control for no response from the 55 sec for US and Canada called station in automatic 140 sec sending mode 90 sec 35 sec 3 7 NOTE Selectors 1 through 6 are not applicable in those models which do not support ECM e Selector 1 Frame length selection Usually a single frame consists of 256 octets 1 octet 8 bits For communications lines with higher bit error rate however set selector 1 to 1 so that the machine can divide a message into 64 octet frames Remarks The error correction mode ECM is a facsimile transmission manner in which the machine divides a message into frames for transmission so that if any data error occurs on the transmission line the machine retransmits only those frames containing the error data e Selector 2 Use of non standard commands If this selector is set to 0 the machine may use non standard commands the machine s native mode commands e g NSF NSC and NSS for communications lf it is set to 1 the machine will use standard commands only e Selectors 3 and 4 No of retries These selectors set the number of retries in each specified modem transmission speed e Selector 5 T5 timer This selector sets the time length for the T5 timer e Selector 6 T1 timer T
48. Insert the supplied CD ROM for Windows into your CD ROM drive If the model name screen appears select your machine lf the language screen appears select your language The CD ROM main menu will appear Click Install Software NOTE If this window does not appear use Windows Explore to run the setup exe program from the root directory of the Brother CD ROM Click MFL Pro Suite in Main Application NOTE e MFL Pro Suite includes Printer Driver Scanner Driver ScanSoff PaperPort 9 ScanSoff Text Bridge PC FAX software Remote Setup and True Type fonts PaperPorf is a document management application for viewing scanned documents e ScanSoft TextBridge which is integrated into PaperPorf is an OCH application that converts an image into text and inserts it into your default word processor Click Install NOTE e If you see the following screen click OK to install the Windows updates After the updates are installed your PC may restart e f it does the installation will automatically continue e f the installation does not continue automatically please open the installer menu again by double clicking the setup exe program from the root directory of the Brother CD ROM and continue from Step 4 When the PaperPort 8 0 SE Setup window is displayed click Next After reading and accepting the ScanSoff License Agreement enter your user information and click Next Select Typical and click Next Cli
49. Laser Unit 1 Remove the filter and then remove the cup S M3x8 Taptite screw and the air duct Hook Filter y Taptite cup S M3x8 2 Disconnect the LD harness 5P from the laser unit 3 Disconnect the polygon motor harness and remove the spongy from the polygon motor harness 4 Remove the six cup S M3x8 Taptite screws and then remove the laser unit Laser unit Spongy Polygon motor harness J LD harness 5P Taptite cup S M3x8 Taptite cup S M3x8 4 44 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 5 Remove the shutter arm C Shutter arm C Frame L 3 16 Main PCB ASSY 1 Disconnect the LD harness 5P 2 Disconnect the four connectors Main PCB ASSY Thermistor connector LD harness 5P EE 5 Main PCB ASSY LVPS connector f s Engine PCB connector GR J oo LCD DO SS EN TET D E Panel PCB connector Fig 4 83 4 45 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 3 Remove the three pan M3x6 screws 4 Remove the five cup S M3x6 Taptite screws and then remove the main PCB ASSY Screw pan SK M3x6 P Taptite cup S M3x6 Main PCB ASSY a Taptite cup S M3x6 Fig 4 84 NOTE After replacing the Main PCB please perform the following operations e Chapter 7 3 12 CIS Scanner Area Setting Maintenance mode 55 Refer to P7 20 e APPENDIX 1 EEPROM CUSTOMIZING CODES Refer to A 1 e APPENDIX 2 1 INSTALING THE UPDATE DATA TO THE MACHINE Refer to A
50. MFC See Optional accessories in Chapter 13 of the User s Guide Turn off and unplug the machine from the AC outlet and disconnect it from your Macintosh if you already connected an interface cable Turn on your Macintosh Insert the supplied CD ROM for Macintosh into your CD ROM drive Double click the Start Here icon to install the printer scanner and PC FAX Send drivers If the language screen appears select your language Click Install next to the MFL Pro Suite for your country After the installation is completed restart your Macintosh Connect the network interface cable to the printer and then connect it to a free port on your hub Plug the machine into the AC power outlet Turn the power switch on Open the Chooser from the Apple menu Click the Brother Laser AT icon and then select BRN xxxxxx P1 Click Setup NOTE xxxxxx are the last six digits of the Ethernet adaress Click OK and then close the Chooser NOTE Network User s Guide Chapter 7 on the CD ROM The setup is now complete 2 30 3 2 8 For MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL Optional NC 9100h Network Interface Users For Mac OS X 10 1 10 2 1 or greater Users 1 kb 2 aso 9 16 Make sure that the NC 9100h Network Print Fax Server is installed into the MFC See Optional accessories in Chapter 13 of the User s Guide Turn off and unplug the machine from the AC outlet and disconnect it from your Macintosh if you alr
51. NCU CM H 735 5 TP158 z 4m OVW cae ZD1 po DTC143ZUA MTZJB 2 gt vDD3 C104 PITCH 5 d H O M V O M V NCU CI age c4 C101 F ov RS 360 NCULPLS may TP159 vpo3 O 5 34 Ce C103 Al R16 dos 1 8k Cx 1 F ZD3 TP154 02022 Z TPH3 N E 2DZ2 0 Z TPH3 R50 R54 ES ES F 1 5k VF 156 TP157 BA10324AF n 1 F 9 5 11 4 7k AREF O NCU2_POL REFERENCE VOLTAGE MOV MSV Moy Reg Uk e 11 NCU MJTE res 2 gi f TEC TP455 C104 SSM3K01T AREF NCU2_CHAG P 34RIN TP3090 GIJI gt 4A HOOK c29 FE3 10V101M F 5xL11 SPKR white MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL APPENDIX 4 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Appendix 4 7 Engine PCB Circuit Diagram 1 2 A EA A A fe CN4 MFAN RED pa 9m CN7 vec3 vec24 HEAT THM EJECT TT o voca O VCC3 R1 R73 s 68k 10k R101 MAIN FANG4V E EJECT EJECT D CN6 100 c67 SCH B M 93 R74 SC MOT Ces R1 n c d PEAK 350mA BLUE vcca AN 2 2k AVE 291m4 cea GND j A2071 1 1 0 V STBY 25mA C104 P I ItR hFE 190 390 o R98 711mAt11mA 2 2k 5025 m SEK 26W di th f RS9 R63 C141 d S Ca MECT 10k 100 ces Ic 24V 2 KQ SCANNER MOTOR P dep rm xix URSIHGSOMCA C o E n A MAIN FAN12V ta 761 50V C334 C103 SCAN SLEEPONN e a 1 58 B 06 3xL9 EMI 3 SCANER MOTOR POWER p Pitch pro sr eg voces 3 3V 0N GNO OGND vecs Q V OFF CNS 3 ROS R87 GND GND SFAN 4 7k KC Age U1 10k PURPLE f 32kHz ANALOG Y HEATEFCHE D se 0k SCAN DRIVE Ee
52. OFF duration is a minimum of 90 ms long then the machine will interpret the short OFF as OFF e Selector 8 CHANGE DRUM SOON message This selector determines whether or not the CHANGE DRUM SOON message should appear on the LCD when the service life of the laser sensitive drum in the laser unit will expire soon A 34 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL WSW32 Function setting 10 Default contrast Automatic Super light Super dark 4 No Standard Default resolution Fine Super fine Photo e Selectors 5 and 6 Default resolution These selectors set the default resolution which applies when the machine is powered up or completes a transaction e Selectors 7 and 8 Default contrast These selectors set the default contrast which applies when the machine is powered up or completes a transaction WSW33 Function setting 11 Not used 1 5 Report output of polled trans 7 b jm 00000 0 ee Selector 6 is not applicable to American versions NOTE A 35 APPENDIX 3 FIRMWARE SWITCHS WSW WSW34 Function setting 12 Not used Number of DTMF tone signals for inhibiting the detection of CNG during external TAD operation NOTE Selectors 4 and 5 are not applicable to the American version e Selectors 6 and 7 Number of DTMF tone signals for inhibiting the detection of CNG during external TAD operation If the machine receives this specified number of DTMF tone signals during external
53. PF PEGFRONT sos DX SOL HV DEVPWM Fi O GNO 52 2 4 ED 64 Tea Sp PEG SOL DECDEAD LV e i 120 24 FRONT COVER gt EGREAR INT a Fi m 3 za ES T1 PAPER gt E SOLS 38 9 HEATER ON BmABUF 51 x MP PAPER Re COVERUINT w MAIN FAN24V 50 33 2 4A HV NOISESENSI REG REAR 4CASETUINT MEAN ges H F EmABUF T Y 2 ICP NGB GND FES FRONT ee IPAPER a RADTAL Pitch 5 d veca de HEATO 5 TOER LED vec24 O ND T2 CASETTE PPAPER INTI BEV 1 54 D reset High FOR SAFETY STANDARD 1 3 3V 2 xQ DX REARCOVER Pez 49 Loermm e ci See ON GNDO 47 25 2p SLEEPO DC REV B T2 PAPER P APER EEPONNO zu g Te FEGIST gt REI Ist ne ag THM1 O D CMP FSTN 8 A1037AK 40 2 10 q EJECT paar DXPAPER PB 4 fe D EJECT JAM 375 DXRCOVERIINT HCI 315 TONEROMP PAM 39 15 EMI LVPS FAN12V 4 evt CMPP 2757 HEATEROMP PWM vecs SS UPS FANGAV g sa ekar A MAIN FAN12V A PRYI93 DEVP e HV DEVPWM 3 DX PSIZE pa SE 4 HV VERSION gt z fas RANSP gg HV TRANSPIM T4 CASSETTE B PEVIOG INT 20 HEATOFF SENSN 96 FEVIO7 INT e EOS LUB294001 vccs E DTA143ZUA r 2 e x vccs LEDON REG FRONT TS S c102 C102 Ic 3 3V 68K 49 4A 9CN19 Ve REB FRONT R79 YELLOW SE vecs GND TO DX SENSOR PCB B512157 DX TRAY DX PSIZE 0R17 9c11 100 C102 C102 IS e E CO Ne TEE A 55 APPENDIX 4 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Appendix 4 9 NCU PCB Circuit Diagram Europe R41 491 C MJ 62J FD315 ie ie rekt RI roj d J3
54. Run On Line Registration and then click Next 20 Click Finish to restart your computer OK A Basic Universal printer driver was installed with the MFL PRO Software Suite which is certified for use with Windows operating systems Brother also offers a fully featured printer driver Native driver that includes more features than the Basic Universal driver However this driver does not include a Windows certificate To install the Brother Native driver proceed to step 21 NOTE For details on what features are available see chapter 2 of the Software User s Guide 2 16 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL Brother Native driver Installation 21 Click Start and select Printers and Faxes Click on Add a printer and the Add Printer Wizard will start When this screen appears click Next 22 Un check the Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer selection and then click Next 23 Select USBXXX from the pull down window for the Printer Port Selection and then click Next 24 Click on Have Disk 25 Browse the CD ROM and highlight your language folder and click Open Highlight the WXP folder and click Open Highlight the Addprt folder and click Open 26 Click Open 27 Make sure X ENG W2K Addprt is displayed in the window and click OK X is the drive letter of your CD ROM 28 Highlight the model you are installing from the list of machines and click Next NOTE Make sure you select a USB prin
55. TAD operation it will not detect CNG afterwards If these selectors are set to 1 1 the CNG detection will not be inhibited WSW35 Function setting 13 8 Not used A 36 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL WSW36 Function setting 14 Ey seus rar Recovery from inactive PC PC power off recognition time 0 Normal Long w RN N 0 Not ignored 4 448 Hz 8 244 Hz 12 162 Hz 6 122 Hz 0 97 Hz 4 81 Hz 8 69 Hz ECP Enhanced Capabilities Port OH sch O0 O OO Lower limit of frequency to be ignored after detection of calling signals Ci e Selector 1 ECP mode The ECP mode enhances the normal bidirectional communications between the machine and the connected PC for higher transmission speed e Selector 2 Recovery from inactive PC interface If the machine recognizes via the STB signal line that the connected PC is powered off it will turn the PC interface outputs Low to protect the PC from hazards that could be caused by weak electric current accidentally flown from the machine This selector determines whether the machine should recover from the inactive PC interface to normal interfacing state upon receipt of data from the PC e Selector 3 PC power off recognition time This selector sets the time length from when the machine detects the PC powered off until it recognizes the detected state as power off If selector 2 is set to 0 it is recommended that selector 3 be se
56. TN Toner sensor Toner detected MN Manual feed sensor No paper detected Regist front sensor RS Regist rear sensor No paper detected CS Cassette sensor No paper tray loaded P1 Tray 1 paper sensor Paper detected P2 Tray 2 paper sensor Paper detected C2 2nd cassette sensor No paper tray loaded R2 2nd regist sensor No paper detected FU Fixing sensor No paper detected PO Paper eject sensor No paper jam These error indications will always be displayed in models not equipped with a 2nd paper tray 7 15 CHAPTER 7 MAINTENANCE MODE 2 Change the detecting conditions to check that the indication on the LCD changes according to the sensor states For instance insert paper through the document front or rear sensor or the regist sensor s open the front cover or the document cover remove the toner cartridge jam paper at the paper outlet insert paper from the manual feeder and load a paper tray etc 3 Press the Stop Exit button The machine beeps for one second and return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode NOTE If you have opened and closed the front cover during the above procedure you need to open and close the front cover again upon completion of the procedure 7 16 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 10 Received Data Transfer Function Maintenance mode 53 lt Function gt This function is to transfer received data to another FAX equipment when the machine fails to print out the data bec
57. The paper tray may be too full Load paper below 27mm in depth 4 Check the paper used meets the recommended paper specifications 6 16 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL User Check 1 Check the paper used meets the recommended paper specifications Both high temperature and humidity will cause paper to curl 2 If the machine is used infrequently the paper may have sat for too long in the paper tray Turn over the stack of paper in the paper tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the paper tray 3 Try printing using the straight through output path NOTE For no paper supplied as the cause of a malfunction see M 4 No paper supplied in 6 MALFUNCTIONS in this Chapter 6 17 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 4 SOFTWARE SETTING PROBLEMS The machine may not print the data correctly if there are incorrect software settings ER There was an error writing to LPT1 or BRUSB for the machine error message appears Ka User Check 1 Check that the printer cable is not damaged or broken Check also that the cable is connected to the correct interface connectors of both the machine and PC Check that the correct machine is selected if you have an interface switching device Check that the appropriate printer driver is selected as Set as Default Check also that the correct print port is set for the selected printer driver Check that the machine is not connected to the same port which is also connecte
58. bed scanner e Selectors 3 and 8 Masking of symbol rate s These selectors allow you to limit the transmission speed range in the V 34 mode by masking the desired symbol rate s Transmission speeds assigned to the symbol rates are listed below The setting made by these selectors will limit the setting made by selectors 1 through 4 of WSW39 If selector 3 is set to 1 to mask the 3429 symbols second when the first transmission speed choice is 33600 bps specified by selectors 1 through 4 of WSW39 for example the allowable maximum transmission speed will be limited to 31200 bps If selector 8 is set to 1 to mask the 2400 symbols second when the first transmission speed choice is 33600 bps then the allowable maximum transmission speed remains 33600 bps If selector 8 is set to 1 to mask the 2400 symbols second when the first transmission speed choice is 21600 bps specified by selectors 1 through 4 of WSW39 the allowable maximum transmission speed remains 21600 bps but the minimum transmission speed will be limited to 4800 bps Symbol rate Transmission speed Symbol rate Transmission speed Symbol rate Transmission speed bps bps bps 2400 2400 3429 4800 4800 7200 7200 9600 9600 12000 12000 14400 14400 16800 16800 19200 19200 21600 21600 24000 2800 4800 28800 7200 31200 9600 33600 12000 14400 16800 19200 21600 24000 26400 A 41 APPENDIX 3 FIRMWARE SWITCHS WSW WSW41 Function setting 19 16 hours 24
59. been fed To stop this operation and return to the equipment to the initial stage of the maintenance mode press the Stop Exit button 1 When you press the Set button while the MACHINE ERR error code is displayed the last error code is displayed Each time the Set button is pressed up to the ten error codes are displayed one by one in reverse order 2 When you press the Set button while the COMEER 1 error is displayed the last error the previous error and the second previous error are displayed in turn The indication changes from COMEER1 COMEER2 to COMEER3 23 CHAPTER 7 MAINTENANCE MODE 7 24 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 16 Machine Error Code Indication Maintenance mode 82 lt Function gt This function displays an error code of the last error on the LCD lt Operating Procedure gt 1 Press the 8 and 2 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode The LCD shows the MACHINE ERROR X X 2 Press the Stop Exit button Return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode 3 17 Output of Transmission Log to the Telephone Line Maintenance mode 87 lt Function gt This function outputs the transmission log that the machine has stored about the latest transmission to the telephone line lt allows the service personnel to receive the transmission log of the user s machine at a remote location and use it for analyzing problems arising in the user s machine lt Operating Procedu
60. been installed and the installation is now complete 2 22 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 2 3 For Windows NT Workstation Version 4 0 Users 1 Turn on your computer You must be logged on as the Administrator 2 Connect the parallel interface cable to your computer and then connect it to the machine Caution Do not plug the power cord before connecting the parallel interface cable lt may cause damage to your machine 3 Plug the machine into the AC power outlet Turn the power switch on 4 Insert the supplied CD ROM for Windows into your CD ROM drive If the model name screen appears select your machine If the language screen appears select your language 5 The CD ROM main menu will appear Click Install Software NOTE If this window does not appear use Windows Explore to run the setup exe program from the root directory of the Brother CD ROM 6 Click MFL Pro Suite in Main Application NOTE e MFL Pro Suite includes Printer Driver Scanner Driver ScanSoff PaperPorf ScanSoft Text Bridge PC FAX software Remote Setup and True Type fonts e PaperPorf is a document management application for viewing scanned documents e ScanSoff TextBridge which is integrated into PaperPort is an OCR application that converts an image into text and inserts it into your default word processor 7 Click Install NOTE e f you see the following screen click OK to install the Windows updates Af
61. driver Scanner driver Brother PC FAX Send and Remote Setup program If the language screen appears select your language Scanning is not supported in Mac OS 10 1 Click Install next to the MFL Pro Suite Select USB Interface and then click Install Connect the USB interface cable to your Macintosh and then connect it to the machine Caution Do not connect the machine to a USB port on a keyboard or a non powered USB hub Plug the machine into the AC power outlet Turn the power switch on Select Applications from the Go menu Open the Utilities folder Open the Printer Center icon Click Add Printer Select USB Select your machine and then click Add Select Quit Printer Center from the Printer Center menu The Brother Printer driver Scanner driver Brother PC FAX Send and Remote Setup Program have been installed and the installation is now complete 16 OK To install Presto H PageManager click Install next to the Presto PageManager icon and follow on the Screen instructions NOTE You can easily scan share and organize photos and documents using Presto PageManagef Presto PageManager has been installed and the installation is now complete 2 29 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND BASIC OPERATION 3 2 7 For Optional NC 9100h Network Interface Users For Mac OS 8 6 to 9 2 Users 1 aso 9 2 12 OK Make sure that the NC 9100h Network Print Fax Server is installed into the
62. e The more that is printed the more toner will be used e Ifyou change the print density setting for lighter or darker printing the amount of toner that is used will change e Wait to unpack the toner cartridge until immediately before you install it in the machine Toner Low message When the toner cartridge is running low the LCD shows Toner Low Toner Low Fig 5 6 If the LCD shows this message the toner cartridge has nearly run out of toner Buy a new toner cartridge and have it ready before you get a Toner Empty message Toner Empty message Toner EMpEY Fig 5 7 Replacement Procedure 1 Press the front cover release button and then open the front cover 2 Pull out the drum unit Front cover release button Fig 5 8 5 4 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL caution e Itis recommended to place the drum unit assembly on a piece of disposable paper or cloth in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner e To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity do not touch the electrodes shown in the figure below 3 Push down the blue lock lever and take the toner cartridge out of the drum unit 4 Unpack the new toner cartridge Hold the cartridge level with both hands and gently rock it from side to side five or six times to spread the toner evenly inside the cartridge 5 Remove the protective cover 6 Put the new toner cartridge firmly into the drum unit until you hear it lock int
63. hours 12 hours 8 hours 4 hours 2 hours 10 minutes 0 minute Z O ON duration of the fluorescent lamp built in the CIS unit Not used a a a OOOO O O O O CO sch OO eh O ON Modem attenuator 1 3 Broadcast report via e mail 5 8 NOTE e WSW41 takes effect only in the V 34 mode e Selectors 1 through 3 are applicable only to models equipped with a flat bed scanner e Selectors 1 through 3 ON duration of the fluorescent lamp built in the CIS unit Not used If the scanning operation is started when the fluorescent lamp is off then the lamp will come on for scanning These selectors determine how long the lamp will stay ON after scanning If these selectors are set to 1 1 1 the fluorescent lamp will go off after the scanning Sequence e Selectors 5 through 8 Modem attenuator These selectors are used to adjust the transmitting level of the modem when the reception level at the remote station is improper due to line loss This function applies to super G3 protocol signals A 42 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL WSW42 Function setting 20 Incoming mail server POP 0 OFF 1 ON Incoming mail server SMTP 0 OFF 1 ON Internet FAX forward function 0 OFF 1 ON JBIG coding system 0 Disabled 1 Enabled POP Post Office Protocol SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol JBIG Joint Bi level Image Group NOTE e Selectors 1 through 3 are applicable to those mo
64. in the Documentation Software User s Guide located on the CD ROM OK The Brother PC FAX Printer and Scanner drivers have been installed and the installation is now complete MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL lt For Windows 2000 Professional Users Only gt Make sure that you followed the instructions in 1 to 16 on pages 2 13 to 2 14 17 When this screen appears connect the USB interface cable to your PC and then connect it to the machine Plug the machine into the AC power outlet Turn the power switch on It will take a few seconds for the installation screen to appear The installation of the Brother drivers will automatically start Follow the instructions on the screen 18 Ifthe Digital Signature Not Found dialog boxes appear click Yes to install the driver The README file will be displayed Please read this file for troubleshooting information and then close the file to continue installation 20 Check the Run On Line Registration and then click Next 21 Click Finish to restart your computer 22 After the computer restarts click Yes to have the Control Center load each time Windows is started The Control Center will appear as an icon in the task tray If you click No the Scan keys on the machine will be disabled NOTE Even if you select NO you will be able to launch the Brother Control Center later to use the Scan key by double clicking the Smart Ul icon on the desktop This loads the Brother Contro
65. intend to use Parallel or USB e For Parallel use a bi directional shield interface cable that is IEEE 1284 compliant and not longer than 6 feet 2 meters e For USB use a Hi Speed USB 2 0 interface cable that is not longer than 6 feet 2 meters e Please make sure that you use a Hi Speed USB 2 0 certified cable if your computer uses a Hi Speed USB 2 0 interface e Even if your computer has a USB 1 1 interface you can connect the machine 2 3 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND BASIC OPERATION CAUTION When you move the machine grasp the side handholds that are at the bottom shown in the illustration 3 3 1 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL INSTALL THE MACHINE You need to implement hardware setup and driver installation to use the machine Firstly identify the Operating System on your computer Windows 95 98 Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 XP and Macintosh Then purchase the appropriate interface cable Parallel USB or Network for your computer Most existing parallel cables support bi directional communication but some might have an incompatible pin assignment or may not be IEEE 1284 compliant The installation programs for the hardware setup and driver installation are contained on the supplied CD ROM For All Users For Windows users 1 Turn on the PC power Insert the supplied CD ROM into the CD ROM drive The opening screen will appear automatically Follow the on screen instructions NOTE If the op
66. mode 54 lt Function gt This function is to adjust the scan start end positions lt Operating Procedure gt 1 2 Press the 5 and 4 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode The SCAN START ADJ will appear on the LCD After a while the present compensation levels of the scan start end positions are displayed Compensation levels can be adjusted in 11 steps from 5 to 5 mm Press the left arrow key to increase compensation levels and the right arrow key to lower them Press the Stop Exit button and the machine returns to the initial state of the maintenance mode without adjusting compensation levels Press the Set button The ACCEPTED will appear on the LCD One second later the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode Leading edge of document Trailling edge of document Fig 7 13 NOTE The correlation between the scan start end positions and compensation levels is shown below 7 19 CHAPTER 7 MAINTENANCE MODE IMAINTENANCE III Stop Exit button Left arrow key Right arrow key H Stop Exit button Set button ACCEPTED 1 second later Fig 7 14 Left arrow key ec 9 Right arrow key Fig 7 15 3 12 CIS Scanner Area Setting Maintenance mode 55 lt Function gt This function is to set the scanning area of the CIS scanner of this machine and store the setting value in the EEPROM lt Operating Procedure
67. of lines containing an error per page Total number of lines per page set by these selectors e Selector 8 Limitation of attenuation level Setting this selector to 0 limits the transmitting level of the modem to 10 dB This setting has priority over the settings selected by WSWO 2 selectors 5 through 8 and WSW 13 selectors 5 through 8 A 28 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL WSW24 TAD setting 2 1 Not used o No Time length from CML ON to start of pseudo ring backtone transmission Not used e Selectors 3 and 4 Time length from CML ON to start of pseudo ring backtone transmission These selectors set the length of time from CML ON up to the start of pseudo ring backtone transmission WSW25 TAD setting 3 1 Not used 4 No Pause between paging number and PIN 5 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 a OO seh eh COO OO Sch Or O O 0 zl e um A e Selectors 5 through 7 Pause between paging number and PIN These selectors set the pause time between a telephone number being paged and PIN private identification number for the paging feature A 29 APPENDIX 3 FIRMWARE SWITCHS WSW WSW26 Function setting 4 KEE NNNM Dialing during document reading into the temporary memory in in Disabled 1 Enabled memory message transmission No of CNG cycles to be detected when the line is connected via the external telephone in the external TAD mode 1 2 4 No of CNG cycles to be
68. of recording paper by size are shown below Areas excluding the edge measurement from recording paper size are printable areas 2 i 3 2 3 4 4 Ton 85 AS A Postcard 4 2mm 50 dots with the 300dpi mode 4 2mm 50 dots with the 300dpi mode 1 7 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 2 13 Print Speeds with Various Settings Print speed of the machine is up to 18cpm when loading A4 size paper from the paper tray in the plain paper mode Actual print speed varies depending on the paper type or paper size as shown in the tables below lt Letter or A4 size gt OHP 21cpm Letter 20cpm A4 Plain paper 21cpm Letter 20cpm A4 Rather thick plain paper Thin envelope 21cpm Letter 20cpm A4 Thick paper Post card Envelope 21cpm Letter 20cpm A4 Extra thick paper Bond paper Rather thick envelope lt Smaller size than Letter or A4 gt OHP 21cpm Letter 20cpm A4 Plain paper 21cpm Letter 20cpm A4 Rather thick plain paper Thin envelope Thick paper Post card Envelope The print speed may vary according to conditions such as paper size and paper tray NOTE e When a smaller size paper than A4 size is printed the temperature on both edges of the fixing unit is much higher than the temperature on the center of the unit where the paper is fed depending on the setting or model Therefore the print speed is slowed in order to decrease the temperature on the edges after the specified time it i
69. of six chapters and appendices CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND BASIC OPERATION CHAPTER 3 THEORY OF OPERATION CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBLY CHAPTER 5 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING CHAPTER 7 MAINTENANCE MODE APPENDIX 1 EEPROM CUSTOMIZING CODES APPENDIX 2 INSTALLING THE UPDATE DATA APPENDIX 3 FIRMWARE SWITCHS WSW APPENDIX 4 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Information in this manual is subject to change due to improvement or redesign of the product All relevant information in such cases will be supplied in service information bulletins Technical Information A thorough understanding of this printer based on information in this service manual and service information bulletins is required for maintaining its print quality performance and for improving the practical ability to find the cause of problems TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS REGULATION 2aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaanannannununnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnam viii SAFETY INFORMA HON sao ion X GHAPTER 1 GENERA eet 1 1 F e AAA 1 1 A ea TNNT 1 2 ZEN AACS I a e o E EE a E O r S r vordueenitdeenn 1 2 2 2 Environment of Installation Site a aaaaauaaaaaaanaaaauananananaaaauananananunanuanananannannnanannananaaanaa 1 2 2a Papo pY ae ea ee ene ae eee eee 1 2 zr ON 1 3 MEI MEM 1 3 2 6 Specifications for Document Feeding Gvsiem 1 3 2 6 1 Specifications for d
70. of station ID station ID Permitted Prohibited No monitoring Up to phase B at the Tone sound monitoring calling station only All transmission phases both at the calling and called stations e Selectors 2 and 3 Detection enabled time for CNG and no tone After the line is connected via the machine or the external telephone the machine can detect a CNG signal or no tone for the time length specified by these selectors The setting specified by these selectors becomes effective only when selector 8 of WSW20 is set to 1 e Selectors 7 and 8 Tone sound monitoring These selectors set monitoring specifications of the tone sound inputted from the line A 24 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL WSW19 Transmission speed setting First transmission speed choice for fallback 2 400 bps 4 800 bps 7 200 bps 9 600 bps 12 000 bps 14 400 bps OO O O O N O eh OO eh O gt O O O V 34 mode 0 Permitted 1 Prohibited V 17 mode 0 Permitted 1 Prohibited For the transmission speed setting in V 34 mode refer to WSW39 1 3 4 M Last transmission speed choice for fallback 6 NOTE e Selectors 1 through 6 First and last choices of transmission speed for fallback These selectors are used to set the modem speed range With the first transmission speed choice specified by selectors 1 through 3 the machine attempts to establish the transmission link via the modem If the establishment fails the ma
71. photosensitive drum is scratched or deteriorated exposed replace the drum unit and in the machine 1 Check and clean the heat roller with a cloth dampened with alcohol 2 Replace the fixing unit Replace the high voltage power supply PCB Clean contact electrode both on the drum unit 8 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL l 17 Black band de contacts Corona wire 1 Is the wire cleaner at its home No Return the wire cleaner failure position to its home position es Dirt on the 2 Is the corona wire dirty Y 1 Clean the corona corona wire wire 2 If the problem still 2 appears after cleaning replace the drum unit 6 45 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 18 Gray background LT Does the paper being used Hecommend to use the meet the paper specification specified types of paper weight etc Hecommend to change to freshly unpacked paper Toner sensor Is the sign Toner Empty Toner sensor failure Clean the failure displayed on the LCD even toner sensor and check the machine side after removing the drum unit toner sensor connection and toner cartridge Be sure to close the cover after removing the drum unit and toner cartridge Toner cartridge Is the problem solved after Replace the toner cartridge failure replacing the toner cartridge Drum unit failure Is the problem solved after Replace the drum unit replacing the drum unit Replace the high voltage power supply PCB NOTE The fo
72. roller picks up one sheet of paper from the paper tray every time it is rotated and feeds it to the paper feed roller First feed roller Paper feed pinch roller T WA e Q Paper feed roller 5 SS D OM A ta xS EN e Regist front C IN actuator A7 Paper pick up roller CIN OF First feed pinch roller y Separation pad Pressure plate Fig 3 21 The paper is gripped between the paper pick up roller and the separation pad and separated into individual sheets The pick up roller is directly connected to the clutch mechanism whose rotation is stopped by the stopper arm When the pick up solenoid is activated the clutch mechanism is engaged by the solenoid action and the paper pick up roller is driven The paper drawn out of the tray by the pick up roller pushes against the regist front actuator and the paper top position absence of paper is detected by sensing the motion of the actuator 2 3 2 Paper registration After the paper top position is detected by the regist front actuator the paper separated into individual sheets by the paper pick up roller is fed further for a specified time and the paper top position reaches the paper feed roller so that the paper skew is adjusted Then the solenoid is turned off the paper feed roller starts turning and the paper is fed to the transfer block in the drum unit Paper feed T Photosensitive drum p Transfer roller Regist rear ac
73. screws Setting Up the Machine and Your PC 1 To make the machine enter the maintenance mode press the Menu button 2 8 6 and 4 keys in this order I Within 2 seconds gt 2 Turn on your PC A 4 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 2 3 Running the Setup Utility 1 2 On your PC run the ID head property setup utility BRUSBSN EXE The following window will appear Brllsbsn 1 X File F HelptH Port AE M Serial No LLL Head Info Model DCP BU2l C MFE DCP B025D DCP BD 5DN MFC Z DCP 025 1 c BH MEC 8210 1 MFC 8220 C Ed MPO B420 e Printer 1 MFC 8820D Md MFC B8 0DN C Printer MFC 88D Cancel On the Model menu click MFC 2 In Port make sure that the HFC DCP ports connected are shown When not select please click down arrow key and select the USB port of MFC 8220 In the Serial No 000 box type the 9 digit serial number e g G01012345 printed on the nameplate labeled to the back of the machine as an ID code Then press the OK button The setup utility will transmit the ID code data from your PC to the machine and then it will terminate The machine will automatically return to the standby mode To check whether the entered character string ID code is correct make the machine then press the 8 key and 0 key in this order refer to CHAPTER 7 Subsection 3 15 The USB serial number appears on the LCD Check that the character string entered in s
74. server and creating a new print queue in order to eliminate the possibility of setup errors 1 If you changed the login password you must change the password in both the Brother print fax server using the SET NETWARE PASSWORD command if you are using the BRConfig software or by using a web browser or the BRAdmin Professional utility and in the file server using the PCONSOLE Print Fax Server Information Change Password command 2 If you created the print queue using PCONSOLE and instead of BRAdmin Professional utility make sure that you have enabled at least one NetWare file server using the SET NETWARE SERVER servername ENABLED command 3 Have you exceeded your NetWare user limit 4 Make sure that the print fax server name you used in PCONSOLE exactly matches the name that is configured in the print fax server and make sure it is defined as a Queue Server for the print queue 5 If you are running both 802 3 and Ethernet II frames on different file servers on your network there is a possibility that the print fax server may not make a connection to the desired file server Try forcing the frame type to the desired one using the SET NETWARE FRAME command from the print fax server remote console or using BRAdmin Professional utility 6 If you are using DOS CAPTURE statement and losing portions of your print job try setting the TIMEOUT parameter in your CAPTURE statement to a higher value at least 50 seconds for Windows
75. spongy from the scratch spongy holder ASSY Scratch spongy Scratch spongy holder ASSY Scratch spongy springs Pressure roller holder ASSY 7 S J Fig 4 10 4 7 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 12 Remove the two cup B M2 6x5 Taptite screws 13 Release the lock of the pressing plate using the lock lever and then disengage the catches of the side guides R and L from the side guide rack Side guide L Taptite cup B M2 6x5 Taptite cup B M2 6x5 Side guide rack S D HI e C Catches Lock lever Paper tray Side guide rack Side guide L Fig 4 11 14 Remove the side guides right and left from the paper tray Side guide L Side guide R O Paper tray NS 4 8 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 15 Unhook the two catches A of the pressure plate while pulling the plastic frame outwards then unhook the other two catches B of the plate while pulling the plastic frame outwards to remove the pressure plate ASSY Catches A QU Catch B Plastic frame Fig 4 13 16 Unhook the pressure plate spring from the plastic hook to remove the two pressure plate springs Paper tray E Pressure plate spring Hook Pressure plate spring Fig 4 14 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y NOTE When re assembling the pressure plate ASSY ensure that the paper indicator arm is under the pressure plate caution When unhooking the catches to remove the pressure plate do no
76. stable Environment The machine should be installed near a power outlet which is easily accessible The room temperature is maintained between 10 C and 32 5 C The relative humidity is maintained between 2096 and 80 The machine should be used in a well ventilated room Place the machine on a flat horizontal surface Keep the machine clean Do not place the machine in a dusty place Do not place the machine where the ventilation hole of the machine is blocked Keep approximately 100 mm 4 inches between the ventilation hole and the wall Do not place the machine where it is exposed to direct sunlight Use a blind or a heavy curtain to protect the machine from direct sunlight when the machine is unavoidably set up near a window Do not place the machine near devices that contain magnets or generate magnetic fields Do not subject the machine to strong physical shocks or vibrations Do not expose the machine to open flames or salty or corrosive gasses Do not place objects on top of the machine Do not place the machine near an air conditioner Keep the machine horizontal when carrying Do not cover the slots in the side cover 2 1 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND BASIC OPERATION 1 3 System Requirements for Brother Printer Solution Check the following system requirements to setup and operate the printer using Brother Printing Solution Computing System Processor Speed Minimum Recommended Available Operating System Vers
77. status e No light If the both of the two LEDs are off then the print fax server is not connected to the network e Link Speed LED is orange Fast Ethernet The Link Speed LED will be orange if the print fax server is connected to a 100BaseTX Fast Ethernet network e Link Speed LED is green 10BaseT Ethernet The Link Speed LED will blink if the print fax server is receiving or transmitting data If you are using a repeater or hub make sure that SQE heartbeat is turned off at the hub if applicable Also if you have a hub or multi port repeater verify that the hub or repeater port is good by trying the print fax server on a different port or on the other hub or multi port repeater If you have a bridge or router located between the print fax server and host computer make sure that the device is set up to allow the print fax server to send and receive data from the host For example a bridge can be set up to only allow certain types of Ethernet addresses to pass through a process known as filtering therefore such a bridge must be configured to allow Brother print fax server addresses Likewise a router can be set up to pass only certain protocols so be sure that the desired protocol can be passed through to the print fax server If the job exits the queue but does not print make sure that you are not trying to print a text job to a PostScript printer If you have a machine that is capable of automatic language switching
78. such as thinner or benzene will damage the surface of the machine Do not use cleaning materials that contain ammonia They will damage the machine and the toner cartridge 3 2 Cleaning the Scanner Open the control panel cover Clean the white bar document holder and the lower glass cover with a lint free cloth with office equipment cleaning solution White bar Control panel cover Glass cover 9 20 3 3 3 4 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL Cleaning the Drum Unit When replacing the drum unit or toner cartridge with a new one be sure to clean the drum unit 1 Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord 2 Press the front cover release button and then open the front cover 3 Pull out the drum unit caution It is recommended to place the drum unit on a piece of disposable paper or cloth in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner 4 Clean the primary corona wire inside the drum unit by gently sliding the blue tab from right to left several times Return the tab to the home position before re install the drum unit Home position Fig 5 36 caution Make sure that the blue tab on the drum unit is returned to the home position 4 mark position before re installing the drum unit into the machine or printed pages may have vertical stripes 5 Re install the drum unit into the machine 6 Close the front cover Cleaning the Scanner Window When replacing the drum unit or t
79. switch Measure the voltages between reconnect the connector and the terminals Do the turn the power switch on measured voltage satisfy the again If the protector circuit prescribed valued in the table is activated check the below connector the wiring from the connector and the DC load Refer to the chart 1 below Replace the low voltage power supply PCB Low voltage power supply PCB 1 Engine CN8 3 CN8 2 Approx 24V CN10 6 CN10 5 Approx 3 3V If you analyze malfunctions with the power plug inserted into the power outlet special caution should be exercised even if the power switch is OFF because it is a single pole switch 6 20 M 3 Main motor failure MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL Failure of Is the connection of connector connector CN9 on the engine PCB correct Main motor 2 Is the problem solved by No Replace the main motor replacing the main motor Reconnect the connector Engine PCB 3 Is the problem solved by No Replace the engine PCB replacing the engine PCB Main PCB 4 Is the problem solved by No Replace the main PCB replacing the main PCB M 4 No paper supplied Separation pad Is the surface of the separation paper pick up pad or the paper pick up roller roller failure dirty or worn out Is the contact of the solenoid connector on the engine PCB good Engine PCB 3 Set paper in the manual feed circuit tray and make a test print by pressing the control panel button Paper pick up
80. the following parts by using the transferred signal data Main motor e Fan motor e Thermistor e Polygon motor e High voltage power supply Toner sensor e Cover sensor e Front regist sensor e Rear regist sensor Solenoid Upper cassette sensor Lower cassette sensor Upper paper exist sensor Lower paper exist sensor Lower cassette exist sensor Paper eject sensor Fixing unit cover sensor For the circuit diagram of the engine PCB see APPENDIX 4 7 and 4 8 ENGINE PCB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM in this manual Sensor configuration varies according to machine types O Built in X Not built in MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 15 Power Supply 1 5 1 Low voltage power supply The power supply uses a switching regulation system to generate the regulated DC power 3 3V 8V non regulated and 24V which are converted from the AC line The regulated output is listed below Regulated Output 3 3V 1 5A 48V 0 7A 24V 2 9A For the circuit diagram of the low voltage power supply PCB see APPENDIX 4 12 LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY PCB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM in this manual Heater Thermal Fuse Fuse Heater ES Circuit Lamp Lightning O O Surge Absorber Feedback Line Filter Rectifier Oscillator Engin Circuit Main Circuit O 24V 24V Regulation Circuit O 8V i 3 3V E O 3 3V Regulation Circuit Fig 3 17 3 11 CHAPTER 3 THEORY OF OPERATION 1 5 2 High voltage power sup
81. the lamp halogen heater lamp Is it open circuit M 7 Laser Unit failure Harness Is the LD harness connector Heconnect the connector connection on the main PCB secured securely failure 1 correctly Harness Is the polygon motor connector Reconnect the connector connection on the engine PCB secured securely failure 2 correctly Step Check Poor thermistor 1 Is the contact of connector harness contact CN7 on the engine PCB good Blown thermal Remove the fixing unit and fuse measure the resistance between the input connectors Is it open circuit M Thermistor Is the thermistor installed Yes failure properly Reinstall the thermistor properly No Remove the fixing unit and Yes Replace the halogen heater measure the resistance of the halogen heater lamp Is it open circuit Is the heater harness No Reconnect the connectors connector connected to the securely low voltage power supply PCB Halogen heater lamp failure Heater harness connection failure and fixing unit secure 6 22 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL NOTE e This problem will be cleared if leaving the printer power ON for ten minutes e Ifthe heater is cooled down sufficiently this problem may be cleared by enter the maintenance mode after press 9 key twice Be warned however that this operation Will melt the fixing unit if the heater is hot M 10 Main PCB failure Check Main PCB Is it possible to copy No Replace the main PCB f
82. to the initial stage of the maintenance mode When the front cover is opened during the paper feed and paper eject test error sound beeps and Cover Open and Pls Close Cover are displayed When the front cover is closed the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode 7 21 CHAPTER 7 MAINTENANCE MODE 3 14 EEPROM Customizing Maintenance mode 74 Function This function allows you to customize the EEPROM according to language function settings and firmware switch settings The customizing codes list is given in Appendix 1 NOTE If you replace the main PCB be sure to carry out this procedure lt Operating Procedure gt 1 2 Press the 7 and 4 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode The current customizing code e g 9001 in the case of MFC8220 U S A version appears Enter the desired customizing code e g 9001 in the case of MFC8220 U S A version The newly entered code appears NOTE The machine does not work properly when an incorrect code is entered Press the Start button The machine saves the setting and appears the PARAMETER INIT on the LCD The machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode If you press the Stop Exit button or no keys are pressed for one minute in the above procedure the machine stops the procedure and returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode 1 22 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 15 Display
83. 03 C103 C103 GAINTN e s 7 Ss j 1 Spiel 26 1 _ DATA SI5 c103 c103 c103 c103 i viet sel 147BATA S E C135 C428 C427 C425 C438 C443 C451 C460 C464 vona O Upon da ea i68 rt y a ADAI71 al 13 Senat Tt ttt ttt LAN_DACKN T 31 42 4 70 7 211 TP19 R195 33 i TP700 Spiel A CFT E E a D as TUE mb TU as ana h EE C103 C103 C103 C103 BUSDIR 72 IN E ADRI 101 33 45 DATA S 10 S E e ope LAN FEADYN E TP12 1P702 ADR 11 34 47 DATA S 11 vor 5 SS m RUP a3 47 DATA SLIT em 74 za TY aA PTI een sentia 2 35 50 75 TA AN 4 3A 4 7C 6 1A ADR 13 A DATA S 13 ADR 14 R130 36 51 DATA S 14 C144 _ U15 A 4 c SS 5 fo 5 T os 51 S P303 LS Dara stssl C SDCLKO 36PIN TP31 94 TR Ree UI YES 4 1280 it E F INC v O 3 enn Ee ae 3 xc Sr 123 1 R3112N281C x BA 6F 3 1E 3 30 4 10 4 58 4 68 7A 78 3 1D P722 se d R160 4 SDCKE A184 AA 4 7k 3 38 90 TRP uri TP497 B C158 RC m n si A socso oo gt es Ty SDCSN1 FLASH for MAIN PROGRAM lt 88 R176 310 22 SDCSNe R178 ADR 22 3 10 A A n L C161 bc A voog 7 JS D I AN 38 91 R174 33 3C o own 3 10 C156 TS L Aurora wae ba a a a ri 9v E C103 vies U16 X _ CYPRESS ars tor w t r fits 41 2 2 0 5 PUE O wm V O E ADR 2 24 mE vo03 O ev z i ADR 3 23 54 64M mma 22 A s al 29 _ DATA F I anale 20 La email ADRI7 19 ss mr ADRIS 18 35 _ DATA_F 3 47 J vcca Y ADR 9 8 Le _ DATAFIAI
84. 1 7 Remove the front chute ASSY Taptite bind B M4x12 Front chute ASSY Taptite cup S M3x6 Taptite bind B M4x12 Taptite cup S M3x6 Fig 4 98 18 Remove the two shoulder taptite bind B M3x7 5 Taptite screws from front chute guide ASSY 19 Remove the front chute guide ASSY 20 Remove the front tray chute ASSY 21 Remove the roller 6 pressure roller shaft and roller 6 guide OW 6 Pressure roller shaft Roller 6 guide Front chute N lt Taptite shoulder bind B M3x7 5 g chute guide ASSY Front tray chute ASSY p g Taptite shoulder bind B M3x7 5 Fig 4 99 4 54 22 Remove the two bind B M4x12 Taptite screws and then remove the chute 3 Taptite bind B M4x12 Chute 3 Fig 4 100 23 Remove the feed roller gear 24 Remove the bearing F R 25 Remove the feed roller gear shaft Bearing F R Hook SO Feed roller gear shaft A A Bearing F R Feed roller gear Fig 4 101 4 55 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 26 Release the hook of the bearing 5 and then slide the feed roller ASSY in the direction of the arrow 27 Remove the feed roller ASSY 28 Remove the joint 5 and the bearing 5 from the feed roller ASSY r SA Bearing 5 Feed roller ASSY Joint 5 BST S AC N P Hook Fig 4 102 NOTE Be careful that the different direction installation causes jam when you install joint 5 See the figu
85. 102 R164 Aurora Fig 3 4 1 3 8 IEEE1284 Stores the data received from the PC into DRAM as controlled by the DMA controller It is applicable to both normal receiving and bi directional communication nibble mode byte mode ECP mode 74LVX161284 3 3V lt 5 0V level shifter IC stores the pull up resistance in signal wire at the connector side L PC Printer H Printer PC CDCC_DIR CDCC_HD coce 28 VODS O L Hz El s A ei ei er wei t A a s s o s s s s 333383333 o o 0 OOO O O a AAA a ia a cocc D 7 8 DL7 0 a ie 8 8 s s s al 8 a CDCC Dl0 4 s boe ol o o ol oi ol ol o a See s Elia er e Ge s EI e Ee 2 Eme e e EE 5 gt a rey cote u JE a mss UNS n Een g zan 7 h gt o E 230 245 2 INITN CDC Ci A 5B III 2 244 SEINN rit CDC S A E ms 4 HBUSY Gett CDCCI PEI 411 5 ma 5 STBN CD CDCCSLC A 5B e41 6 oy d CDCCFL A 8 i t Se see TT 246 Y ee 3 II acota 238 per P n z WE cocc_ol2 238 250 4 eeng SE ee Se E eom SE as me D CDCC D4 STERN 38 5 30 CDCC D 5 233 3c CDCC D5 232 CDCC D 6 CDCC D6 CDCC D 7 231 CDCC_D7 CDCC D 7 0 3A Cov D 7 6A Fig 3 5 3 4 1 3 4 ROM ES MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL FLASH for DEMO and PCL DL 64Mbit MASK ROM A 128 64Mbit mies ii KAW E ROMCSN1 6734 9 ARle3 O TOWEN Ree TORON BEE 1 70 3A 7C 6 1A P TP3 11 ROMCSN1 ge SSS
86. 103 C103 C103 C103 Fig 3 9 VDD3O NC jJ TIET 6 D D gt d A mn D MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL CN13 888888888 25408405058 22 gt CKEQ NotUse ZL CKE1 NotUse BS NotUse 0E RASN NotUse CASN NotUse 2H WEN WEN NotUse 25 CKO NotUse 135 CK1 NotUse DGMBO CASNO NotUse DGMB1 CASN1 NotUse DGMB2 CASN2 NotUse DQMB3 CASN3 NotUse csa c81 c82 c83 c85 c86 c87 e2 X VREF Not Use The EEPROM is BR24126 type of two wire method with a 8192 x 8bit configuration Aurora 3 7 CHAPTER 3 THEORY OF OPERATION 1 3 9 Reset circuit The reset IC is a R3112N281C The reset voltage is 2 8V typ and the LOW period of reset is 22 4ms typ Aurora 1 3 10 Engine I O The interface with the engine PCB is by full duplex synchronous serial method of which transfer rate is 520kbps ENGINE CN18 Aurora R253 Ehe R DTC144YUA Ml DTC114YUA O ev Fig 3 12 1 3 11 Panel UO The interface with the panel PCB is by full duplex synchronous serial method PANEL CN19 VM V5 so O R236 4 7k TP3070 R237 PNL SDIN C217 ae C101 1P3071 gy p228 PNL SDOUT 945 100 TP3972 R239 PNL CLK 100 TP3 73 TS PNL RSTN 100 vm O 3 t TY Gan P3974 68k SEN RSEN c222 R242 C101 100 v Fig 3 13 1 3 12 Video UO The video signal output from the ASIC is reversed through a transistor and output after being corrected by the buffer IC AWO wes 1 m 2 E 1608
87. 111 2 leeal H S D3 RA 351M V6 2 Sa L4 COIL SBT L2 COIL SBT COIL SBT 1 LZ COIL SBT D5 S1ZB6 TELOFF 6B 5V a O oa TELAL C14 C5395 7 B JW 6C C104 E Gg DND 0 GND QUAZ SH 124DZ W 0C17 C104 35V 1 TLP421 a d IN NN E 155120 dir GND Li FG o loma eno COIL SBT 24 gu Q o0 0 O M JW 24V 45v o Mo o JW A 57 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL AE S O EA A E 7 on c12 rH 5 V c2 24 eR2 510 P1 B18B PH K S RL1 RL28 R17 100k AL1 AL2 t24V 0 MFC B12B PH K S 1pin to 12pin FB B10B PH K S 1pin to 10pin ADRESS L G4A396001 16439601 1 T1 BT 17 BT 27 51 620 C104 35V C1 4 5 V C19 C1 2 NOT ASSY TO 007 031 V 1 00 APPENDIX 4 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Appendix 4 11 Control Panel PCB Circuit Diagram MAIN RELAY KO ECH MAIN CN19 PANEL PANEL HARNESS MAIN RELAY HARNESS PANEL j 0M MAIN RELAY INDEM soar If MAX If MAX 24Vx1 05 2 1Vx6pcs 680 Q x g9 24Vx1 05 2 vx6pcs 15002 x 95 24V 19 SmA MAX 9 3mA MAX 19 SmA 2x 680 x 99 9 3mA ex 1500 Q x 95 vf TYP 2 0v If MAX 24Vx1 5 2 Vx6pcs 3500 Q x 95 4 MA MAX
88. 116 9 Remove the toner sensor PCB unit Light reception Main frame R Toner sensor PCB unit Light reception Fig 4 117 4 64 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 4 PACKING Quick set up guide User s manual CD ROM ADF document output support Handset curled cord Telephone line cord FF Telephone handset Telephone line cord Drum unit ASSY Polystyrene foam ASSY Machine Polystyrene foam ASSY CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 5 GUIDELINES FOR LEAD FREE SOLDER Information on Manually Repairing PCB Soldered with Lead Free Solder This document provides information on how to correctly make manual repairs to a printed circuit board PCB soldered with lead free solder 1 Characteristics of lead free solder Melting point higher than that of conventional tin lead solder Lead free solder approx 220 C Conventional tin lead solder approx 180 C Relatively poor solder wettability and spread difficult to wet and spread and hard Appearance dull and grainy surface different from that of conventional solder Relatively poor wettability rough surface bumps are likely to be formed and solder dragging Poor solder elevation Poor thermal conductivity and heat resistant difficult to melt 2 Metal composition amp wire solder The metal composition of lead free solder allowed for use on PCBs for Brother s products is following LF Compositon Manufacturer Origin Name Indication
89. 2 e APPENDIX 2 2 SETTING ID CODES TO MACHINES Refer to A 4 4 46 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 17 Base Plate LV Insulation Sheet 1 Remove the eight bind B M4x12 Taptite screws 2 Remove the four cup S M3x6 Taptite screws 3 Remove the pan washer M3 5x6 Taptite screw and then remove the ground wire 4 Remove the base plate Taptite bind B M4x12 Taptite cup S M3x6 Taptite bind B M4x12 di Taptite bind B M4x12 Taptite cup S M3x6 Base plate Ground wire p Screw pan washer M3 5x6 Fig 4 85 b Remove the two bind B M4x12 Taptite screws and then remove the LV insulation sheet Taptite bind B M4x12 LV insulation sheet Fig 4 86 4 47 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 3 18 Engine PCB ASSY 1 Disconnect the connectors Toner sensor Fan motor 60 unit connector R light reception connector LT connector Si Polygon motor connector Fan motor 60 connector TS LVPS PCB connector HVPS PCB connector E Engine PCB ASSY O Thermistor relay PCB connector Main motor connector Main PCB connector Toner sensor light emission connector FR solenoid connector FITI O PF solenoid connector Cassette sensor PCB connector O Fig 4 87 2 Remove the two bind B M4x12 Taptite screws and then remove the engine PCB ASSY b Taptite bind B M4x12 TN s SS Engine PCB ASSY lt iN K 7 f 7 D A M 5 R C Fig 4 88 4
90. 285D D44 J 111 1 AL1 AL2 ADRESS LG442500 1 LG4425 11 C102 NOT ASSY o mn oO C35 L8 C2 24 iE TE Gel R22 1 5k AJZ 595 s TA C26 S c6 c23 16V C104 3 a BT 6 we W1 NG i gt 5 oD a ai O I O ie REUS 9 Pa S JWt5 JWt5 uw 5 EAE bs i Term jk gri ie Ge y d m D e N a ol ak 90 ig C24 ac x Le GND ON pes C561 DB4 A2 d i Quem queo ve JW 5 amp 5 A1 ERA15 4 c ISA R24 100k ea ANN 3 P d ve S TmP4234 Kp G5 C104 3 q T lt amp a 5t ZA n a B amp a 18 NE a PB Ze SI TP5 YNN 4 EOM EN E VR C VI TLP627 Se E A ot Kaes M IVNN TLP421 GND 2d L E E ees REF 5V o c9 AKIN oe ra Lig C474 o A Dn _ c R31 E o Sch amp Ate NC 25 V 8 I 4k o8 N O gAn VN nai Gd HE E O REF Q Lu A c28 FAR JW29 Jwe8 K a3 Ca E wis Ais gt x GND 820 16V C1 4 6 I5 Ste 204 C100 4 45V MTZJ48 MTZJ48 JW13 cRb TELOFF a4 FNI m8 6D 3 gt c32 C5395 Al JW 5 o o g ciom E NI 1 D2 et kp AMIS E 188120 DL A t 12 155120 R WS CB rq Cti9e g o C JE JW 18 Rn4 N gt JW6 gt BO o o fp R13 JWt5 ANDE o TELS Jw 5 6D A 56 Appendix 4 10 NCU PCB Circuit Diagram U S A LINE EXT 1 R41 4910 A RA 242M C6 R41 491 A 285D D44 J
91. 3 prse Inter digit pause set by selectors 5 and 6 A 7 APPENDIX 3 FIRMWARE SWITCHS WSW e Selector 7 Switching between pulse DP and tone PB dialing by the function switch This selector determines whether or not the dialing mode may be switched between the pulse DP and tone PB dialing by using the function switch e Selector 8 Default dialing mode pulse DP or tone PB dialing This selector sets the default dialing mode pulse dialing or tone dialing which may be changed by the function switch If the user switches it with the function switch when selector 7 is set to 0 the setting specified by this selector will also be switched automatically WSW02 Tone signal setting Tone signal transmission time length Attenuator for pseudo ring backtone to the line selectable in the range of 0 15 dB 1 2 3 Min pause in tone dialing 4 5 8 e Selectors 1 through 4 Tone signal transmission time length and Min pause in tone dialing These selectors set the tone signal transmission time length and minimum pause in tone dialing Example f 1 2 3 4 and 5 are dialed Tone signal transmission time length set by selectors 1 and 2 eo KA KA pam Min pause set by selectors 3 and 4 e Selectors 5 through 8 Attenuator for pseudo ring backtone to the line These selectors are used to adjust the sound level of beep generated as a ring backtone in the F T mode or as a signal during r
92. 344500080 CKE NotUse CKE4 NotUse NotUse OE RASN NotUse CASN NotUse WEN WEN NotUse CKQ NotUse CK1 NotUse DGMBO CASNO NotUse DGMB1 CASN1 NotUse DGMB2 CASN2 NotUse DGMB3 CASN3 NotUse A cea C81 Nc CB2 c83 ces NC CB6 c87 VREF Not Use AAA AB ES y d S AAA DATA 15 0 1 28 TS pararlo DATA 1 22 DATA F 1 DATA 21 22 DATA F 2 22 DATA 3 RA126 DATA F 3 Lal 22 Y Dn Flal 22 DATA F 5 DATA F 6 DATA F 7 RAi4g Avg SS 2 RM4g a 2 88 Dar Fil 22 DATA F 12 DATA F 13 DATA F 14 Y DATA F 15 R DATA 1 Dal 1 DATA 2 pala TA 3 oal3 DATA 4 Dala TA S pa s DATA 6 pals DATA 7 Dat7 DATA 8 pala DATA 9 Dala TA 10 Dal 10 DATA 11 DG 11 TAL 12 DATA 13 DG 13 TAL 14 Da 14 DATA 15 DG 15 z DATA SI0 DATA SI1 DATA SI2 DATA_S 3 TA 51 3 DATA SI5 DATA 6 DATA S 6 DATA S7 _ 22 DATA S B DATA sIs DATA S 40 DIMM DQ 15 DIMM DQ 31 16 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL Appendix 4 4 Main PCB Circuit Diagram 4 6 A E A EA a SE 7 FLASH for DEMO and PCL DL 64Mbit MASK ROM 128 64mMbit ADF M G 2 Damu CNS LAN FOMCSN1 m5 ADR MI2 m AmS B A3 FON ADR M 4 icd ADAMIS re ADAMIS pe
93. 4 Main PCB Circuit Diagram 4 6 aaaaanaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaannunnanannnannnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnaaannuaa A 51 4 5 Main PCB Circuit Diagram Ge A 52 4 6 Main PCB Circuit Diagram Gi A 53 4 7 Engine PCB Circuit Diagram 1 2 aaanaaaaaaaaaaaaanaaaannanaaaananaananannanannananaananuaaanannanaaaaanaaa A 54 4 8 Engine PCB Circuit Diagram 2 2 aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaanaaaanannanaananuananannananaananaananuaaanannaaaaaanaaa A 55 4 9 NCU PCB Circuit Diagram Europe A 56 4 10 NCU PCB Circuit Diagram USA A 57 4 11 Control Panel PCB Circuit Diagoram cccccccccccccesceeseseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeseeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaas A 58 4 12 Low voltage Power Supply PCB Circuit Diagramm A 59 4 13 High voltage Power Supply PCB Circuit Diagram 100V ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes A 60 4 14 High voltage Power Supply PCB Circuit Diagram 200V nnnnaaaaaaaaa anaaaaaanan nananaaaa A 61 4 15 Back Light PCB Circuit Diagram aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaanaaaananuaaanannaaannanaaaananuaaanannaaaaaanaaa A 62 vii REGULATION REGULATION LASER SAFETY 110 120V MODEL ONLY This printer is certified as a Class laser product under the US Department of Health and Human Services DHHS Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 This means that the printer does not produce hazardous laser radiation oince radiation emitted inside the printer is completely c
94. 4x12 Fig 4 48 2 Remove the four bind B M4x12 Taptite screws and then remove the side cover L Side cover L Taptite bind B M4x12 4 28 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 11 Top Cover ASSY 1 Disconnect the four connectors Main PCB ASSY Connector HS holder Connector CIS O Jo Connector Speaker Connector On AA Control panel Fig 4 50 2 Release the hook and then remove the speaker hold spring and the speaker Speaker hold spring Z sia Fig 4 51 4 29 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 3 Remove the two screws release the four hooks and then remove the top cover ASSY Screw Enc cu Top cover ASSY Hook 4 Remove the two cup B M3x10 Taptite screws and two pins and then remove the handset holder ASSY Top cover ASSY Taptite cup B M3x10 Handset holder ASSY Fig 4 53 4 30 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 5 Release the four hooks and then remove the handset holder upper Handset holder upper Hooks Handset holder lower Fig 4 54 6 Release the hook and then remove the hook PCB ASSY Hook PCB ASSY Handset holder lower Fig 4 55 4 31 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 7 Remove the four bind B M4x12 Taptite screws 8 Release the two hooks and then remove the inner chute Inner chute Taptite bind B M4x12 Taptite bind B M4x12 Top cover ASSY Ho k Fig 4 56 9 Remove the co
95. 59ec 7404 18 1f 18 15 18 13 11 12 12 B9 1a 17 13 18 12 Bd bSec 418 69 18 14 15 18 18 Bb 16 14 12 11 8d 12 c 89 14 59ec 7424 Be 19 11 19 16 13 Be 16 15 Bf Bf 11 14 13 14 19 58ec 438 18 12 12 15 88 18 14 Ge Gc 12 Hf 8f 15 1b 14 14 59ec7448 14 1d Of Bd Ac 12 Bf 12 28 Bb 12 8c 14 1d 18 Ge 59ec74580 Bc 18 1c 88 Be 12 Be Af 14 16 11 Be Bc Ad 13 13 59ec7469 09 18 21 15 la 21 19 la lc 13 15 la 16 1b 1d 24 59ec7474 19 15 le 25 13 1f 19 15 Ib 11 18 14 16 la la 16 59ec 48B 16 18 14 15 22 17 la la c le la 1d 13 le ld la S9ec 494 13 15 18 21 1d 14 17 1d 18 1c 14 17 le 1f 18 la 5S8ecTda 12 14 15 16 14 14 1d 14 19 19 ie 1f 21 22 15 1b 5Sec dbB 16 Be af 19 18 Ib 17 la 18 19 19 28 18 14 11 17 5 ec dcH 13 17 15 22 14 18 Be 15 18 Bf 16 8d Bc 13 8d 11 5S8ec dd8 12 16 17 14 1b Ge c 13 15 13 i4 17 if 12 Be 14 5S8ec deH 18 15 11 Bf Ba 8d 15 17 13 11 14 17 11 12 19 Bb 59ec 41 59ec 75 59ec751 5S8ecbaBH8 59ec 75 5decbalBl dec 75 58ecba20 53ec 75 59ecba3B ESec 5F 598ecba4B BS8ec 5E S9ecba5g 59ec75i 53ecbabs Dec DE Decba g D ec TEE Seca 59ec 5 lt 59ec5a30 59ec75t 598ecbaab 59ec75c 58ecbab8 59ec75c 5SecbacH 59ec75e 58ecbadB 59ec ZE Sdecbaeb 5SgecTbE BSecbafB 59ec761 5S9ecbbBB 59ec bi 59ec6b16 59ec75 5decbb2B 59ec76z 59ec6b38 59ec76E 59ecbb48 D ec E S D ec Ep D ec Et D er EC D ec Ge 59ec Er D ec fe 59e
96. 6 as GE RIBA A A 100 EN 5 CDCC D I7 231 7 c78 cres css oa cass cae4 cien CDCC_D7 hot a LE AE CDCC D 7 1 SA pe C103 199 DBRXD DBRXD DBTXD DBTXD evo 1E 1F 201 PHAXD PHAXD P ba USB_HSDP c o C USB 195 USBVCC ISBVCC ISB 2c C155 migo TPZ18 lar TP2103 680 186 1 5k ce Ern e Wy OVDD3 xQ Sz 183 oe 12k casa zo USBEXT12 P gt wo 2 Lon cies q KI y O V Com AT 49 12 GMHZ alt 102 VENBNO ENBNO Ci rga TRIAS a 109 5E X KOUT voona a EVON D VENEN1 IO 4 TP3045 xsc Q 1104 ce B a ord Ser av KIN VCALNA I9 4TP3010 CBQp AT 49 33 333333MHZ mg pss ENGINE 101 es C EON gt Si R144 TP2 ik BLM18PK221SN1D 253 EE O TAI E ENGDI ENGDO 3 VDD3O PEVO EDO PNLAS DM_RS 6 6 1C PEV1 LEDI PNLO P 5 F R ED2 PNLDO PNL_SDOUT 256 F H ED P RS 2 F IL FPC SST N R 4 ED A RS PNLSK PNLDI nom BS ra sud A Keren eg F DTC114YUA 207 SAXD IO HSTXD IQ 4 TP2010 SCTS I0 HSATS IOL 4 TP2011 E Aurora VDD24 CH Ui E 00 1 B 424v E rn 1608 FEVO SSCG f FEV1 NO USE FEV2 NO USE FG lt gt V mag 24 G7 HM L14 77308 2 FEV3 NO USE TR S Bj COUNT ea DEBUG Pm ER s ore REVS SD_BKUPN _ E re FG lt gt IF_FG EN i ch csa TP71 TP711 Hei 10k Gi H qu c102 IF_FG Wes ei FGe ov H H EMI x o o Ye110w cocci lt gt FG SE F640 5 Oe POV TP712 pays TOUS o IF_FG2 z IF_FG3 TP300 4 CDCC2 lt gt USB ro ai of VH R129 ren O AN
97. 8220 SERVICE MANUAL CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBLY 1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS To avoid creating secondary problems by mishandling follow the warnings and precautions below during maintenance work icem 1 Always turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord from the power outlet before accessing any parts inside the printer 2 Some parts inside the printer are extremely hot immediately after the printer is used When opening the front cover or rear cover to access any parts inside the printer never touch the red colored parts shown in the following figures ees Dee ANA F caution 1 Be careful not to lose screws washers or other parts removed 2 Be sure to apply grease to the gears and applicable positions specified in this chapter 3 When using soldering irons or other heat generating tools take care not to accidentally damage parts such as wires PCBs and covers 4 Before handling any PCBs touch a metal portion of the equipment to discharge any static electricity charge on your body or the electronic parts or components may be damaged 5 When transporting PCBs be sure to wrap them in the correct protective packaging 6 Be sure to replace self tapping screws correctly if removed Unless otherwise specified tighten screws to the following torque values TAPTITE BIND or CUP B M3 0 7N e m M4 0 8N e m TAPTITE CUP S M3 0 8N e m SCREW M3 0 7N e m M4 0 8N e m 7 When conne
98. 98 98SE Me 2000 Professional XP 2 13 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 2 2 For Parallel Interface Cable Users For Windows 95 98 98SE Me 2000 Professional XP c 2 18 3 2 3 For Windows NT Workstation Version 4 0 USCIS ccccccccsecesecseseceseecscececeseeceveceseesevecereren 2 23 3 2 4 For Optional NC 9100h Network Interface Users For Windows 95 98 98SE Me NT 2000 Professional XP eee 2 25 3 2 5 For USB Interface Cable Users For Mac OS 8 6 to 9 2 Users ee 2 28 3 2 6 For USB Interface Cable Users For Mac OS X 10 1 10 2 1 or greater Users 2 29 3 2 7 For Optional NC 9100h Network Interface Users For Mac OS 8 6 to 9 2 Users 2 30 3 2 8 For Optional NC 9100h Network Interface Users For Mac OS X 10 1 10 2 1 or greater Users 2 31 CHAPTER 3 THEORY OF OPERATION 1 nera nnn 3 1 ER en Te Te 3 1 il General BIO Ci Diada EE 3 1 1 2 Main PCB Block Diagram aaaaaaaaainaaaanannannnnunnnnnnannannnannnannanannannanannannnnnannnnanannaaaananaaa 3 2 LSe Man POB EEN 3 3 o E EE 3 3 E r A E o EE II a 3 4 SE LEE TO boa a as 3 4 134 o aora 3 5 So HARO Mido started ii dida deta 3 6 URS ONES tooodo odon oviedo 3 6 Tay Opuonal RAM EE 3 7 12586 EEPROM cera E ee 3 7 BCE WW EE 3 8 E Ka O A e O O 3 8 A EE 3 8 O a 3 8 31o as MAA A 3 9 o C 3 9 14 Engine PCB m 3 10 LS POWER rin 3 11 1 5 1
99. 98 Me network software from the Network Control panel and then reinstalling them as follows e First install the IPX SPX Compatible Protocol or the TCP IP protocol if you are using a later version of JetAdmin the Client for Microsoft Networks and the network adapter card driver e Install the Latest HP JetAdmin software e Restart the system and then add the HP JetAdmin service 6 56 10 8 10 9 10 10 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL Windows 95 98 Me 2000 XP NT 4 0 Peer to Peer Print NetBIOS Troubleshooting If you are having trouble printing on a Windows 95 98 Me 2000 XP NT 4 0 or later Peer to Peer network NetBIOS check the following 1 Make sure that the Brother NetBIOS Port driver is securely installed and configured according to the Windows 95 98 Me 2000 XP NT 4 0 Peer to Peer NetBIOS chapters You may find that during the installation of the port driver the screen that prompts you for a Port name is not displayed This happens on some Windows 95 98 Me 2000 XP NT 4 0 computers Press the ALT and TAB keys to make it appear 2 Make sure that the print fax server is configured to be in the same workgroup or domain as the rest of your computers It may take several minutes for the print fax server to appear in the network neighborhood Brother Internet Print TCP IP Troubleshooting 1 The first step in troubleshooting is to make sure that you have a valid E mail connection on both the sending PC and the rec
100. A 51 APPENDIX 4 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Appendix 4 5 Main PCB Circuit Diagram 5 6 PAD 31 R PADI 112 ui 171 61 Panoga PRS Q PADO1 PADI2 114 168 PS p170 LESA 3 uz 58 ees um DS Pm PADO3 PADI 4 116 169 ma T38 ema 59 5 118 PAD 4 GACLKOUT 33 P Son ae T P CTA ee RR SS GE St 142 e To Panis Ltd 141 wi enu SI mt se Lett me 140 1 am SI mr CR PADI 13 9 pona a Do im RCM PADI 14 0 Meus SL T mx Lewis ia pos EE a PADI 16 PADI 17 PAD17 TP332 PADI 18 146 135 R162 Ta e 1 PADI 19 PAD19 TP333 PADI 2 151 134 R147 leote we PSERA a 155 PAD21 P334 PADI 22 PAD22 PAD 23 154 24 156 62 PAD l m PAD24 PADI 25 por me fe PADI 26 Kees PADI 27 motel i PADI 28 rola tea Pe t us PADI 29 PADI mots e pos t m PADI 3 PADI 1 PAD3 pans e SERGE PAD31 CBEN 3 2 1E CBENIO 121 PADI 4 111 ziel 110 PBEN1 CBEN 2 143 EE PADI6 1 9 TEEN fo set 108 105 Mas Ge 172 167 P 104 PREG1 my PREGNI PGNTNA ADI P500 PADI 10 103 R151 173 170 PADI 11 102 10k PREGN2 om 1P325 R132 10k 1P501 PADI 12 101 fy el ae 100 PINTAN pt PINTAN PADI 13 D TP5 2 PADI 14 97 175 PADI 15 96 DS 10k PINTEN 1P503 Aurora PADI 16 PADI 17 84 PADI 18 83 PADI 19 8e PADI 2 81 PAD 24 74 PADI 25 73 PADI 26 72 PAD 27 70 PAD 28 69 PADI 29 68 PAD 30 67 PAD 31 66 PAD 31 0 1A CBENI 106 CBENI 1 5 CBEN 2 86 CBEN 3 75 E CBEN 3 01
101. ANING averia ee eae eee ee 5 20 3 1 Cleaning the Machine Exterior aaaiaaaaaaaaaaaaananaaaaaaanaaaananuaaaaaanaaannannananannanaaanannaaaa 5 20 3 2 Cleaning the Gcamner ni 5 20 33 Cleaning Ne Drum Kn UE 5 21 3 4 Cleaning the Scanner Wumdow ennemis nnn 5 21 3 5 Cleaning the Electrical Terminals nnne 5 22 MUSEU ricino a mianiumectaiatleueiavoates 5 23 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 1 INTRODUCTION nn a d ni a BS Ria 6 1 P H R is AA e CES UE OU qeenaied gee sysacansedend ges sete aaueeieaenneese 6 1 1 2 Warnings for Maintenance Work nennen nnne nnn nnns 6 2 FE NE O dee Wet PU A 6 3 E ERROR MESSAGE EE 6 4 21 Err r Message oh the LOD uscar iros 6 4 2 2 Error Codes Shown in the MACHINE ERROR X message 6 6 B PAPER PROBLEMS sb aaa a a a a reacia 6 10 3 1 Paper Loading ProblemS nnne nnne nennen 6 10 32 A T o un less cecieeece se saeseegnsiscensauedesaesces 6 11 3 2 1 Original is jammed in the ADF Automatic document Ieecdert 6 11 E SE E rentar ao a FN 6 11 3 3 1 CICAMAG Runn 6 11 3 3 2 Causes amp CGountermeaeures enne nnai nnns nans nnns nn 6 15 SA Paper Feeding Problems aaiannnannaaaaaannaunaannnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnunnnannnnnnnnnnannnnannnnnnaaaa 6 16 4 SOFIWABESETEBNU PROBLE Mae 6 18 5 MALEUNGTIONG nmn nnnm nmnenren nnne nn nne nnns 6 20 6 TROUBLESHOOTING OF THE CONTROL PANEL atorrante 6 24 7 TROUBLESHOOTING OF FAX FUNCTIONS
102. APTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 23 Disconnect the connector for the eject sensor harness from the thermistor relay PCB ASSY 24 Release the eject sensor harness from the three hooks 25 Remove the bind B M3x10 Taptite screw and then remove the eject sensor PCB ASSY 26 Remove the bind B M3x10 Taptite screw and then remove the thermistor relay PCB ASSY Hook Hooks Eject sensor harness Taptite bind B M3x10 Thermistor relay PCB ASSY Eject sensor PCB ASSY FU frame lower Taptite bind B M3x10 Fig 4 76 27 Remove the paper eject actuator and eject actuator spring d Eject actuator spring Paper eject actuator FU frame lower Fig 4 77 4 42 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL NOTE When re assembling the paper eject actuator and the eject actuator spring to the FU frame lower ensure the paper eject actuator is seated correctly in the locating channel referring to the figure below FU frame lower PNA P d Eject actuator spring Fig 4 78 Paper eject actuator 28 Disconnect the heater harness 29 28 29 Remove the four cup B M3x6 Taptite screws 30 Remove the four separate claw holder plate 31 31 Remove the four separate claw ASSY Taptite cup B M3x6 e Separate claw ASSY Separate claw ASSY Separate claw holder plate Heater harness S l Kg 2 SS Tweezers ER Fig 4 79 4 43 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 3 15
103. Brother CD ROM and continue from Step 5 When the PaperPort 8 0 SE Setup window is displayed click Next After reading and accepting the ScanSoff License Agreement enter your user information and click Next Select Typical and click Next Click Install and PaperPort will start installing on your computer When the PaperPort 8 0 SE Registration screen is displayed make your selection and follow the on screen instructions Click Finish to complete installation When the Brother MFL Pro Suite Installation window appears click Next NOTE If an error message appears at this point in the installation process or if you have previously installed the MFL Pro Suite you will first have to uninstall it From the Start menu select Programs Brother Brother MFL Pro Suite Uninstall and then follow the instructions on the screen 2 25 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND BASIC OPERATION 15 When the Brother Software License Agreement window appears click Yes 16 Select Network Interface and then click Next 17 Select Standard and then click Next The application files will be copied to your computer NOTE If you want to install the PS Brother PostScript driver select Custom and then follow the on screen instructions When the Select Components screen appears check PS Printer Driver and then continue following the on screen instructions 18 Select Search the network for devices and choose from a list of discovered d
104. CDs on the machine control panel indicate Toner Empty If the LCDs indicate Toner Empty replace the cartridge with a new one For further information on consumable parts refer to 1 CONSUMABLE PARTS in CHAPTER 5 6 1 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 2 4 Others Condensation When the machine is moved from a cold room into a warm room in cold weather condensation may occur inside the machine causing various problems as listed below e Condensation on the optical surfaces such as the scanning mirror lenses the reflection mirror and the protection glass may cause the print image to be light e f the photosensitive drum is cold the electrical resistance of the photosensitive layer is increased making it impossible to obtain the correct contrast when printing e Condensation on the corona unit may cause corona charge leakage e Condensation on the hopper plate and separation pad may cause paper feed troubles If condensation has occurred print several pages or leave the machine for 2 hours to allow it to reach room temperature If the drum unit is unpacked soon after it is moved from a cold room to a warm room condensation may occur inside the unit which may cause incorrect images Instruct the user to allow the unit to come to room temperature before unpacking it This will take one or two hours Warnings for Maintenance Work To avoid creating secondary problems by mishandling follow the warnings below durin
105. CN10 red N D N 80 2 Appendix 4 6 Main PCB Circuit Diagram 6 6 HC 49 U 528 224MHZ ov TOWEN IORON 2 20 TPES D 48 TPB6 51 lix ins TPB8 FESER TPB9 RESER 66 TP90 RESER TP91 hESER TP92 PESER c5 Ce us Re8 5 E ALO aal o9 R7 C 9 4k gt ALI CLKIN C61 Com res O VDD3 P 10k q 5 CS 1 38 1 407 1 707 4 107 42 70 79 174C71 70 4 1A 4 3A 4 7C CFD ADR MI2 sel ADR MI3 97 ADR_M 6 4 A ADR M 6 2 MES E ANALOG 32 V34RIN e IN R79 vm o AM Z RINGD TP62 TP64 C30 R51 C104 10k O ev K R77 33 TPe8 64 VO O CLK 7 TP73 17 20 TP74 41 TP75 1 TP76 054 55 P77 C55 TP78 b css TP79 RESERVED1 14 TPB RESERVED14 5 TP81 RESERVED15 eck RESERVED35 36 d s 8 eg ED36 TP84 RESERVED39 RESERVED4 RESERVED48 ED51 EDS9 ED6 ED66 EDS EDS FM336PLUS A 53 98 9 5 LS LS C SCHEID MS dr 192 l ET n MES ANALOG SW PLL GND Ov ora V O 4 9 MEN 16pin TSSOP 7 a TP93 VDD3 oT3 72 O V0D5 O 4 OM5v al TP94 C24 ree C1004 10V 12V 10k FE3 10V101M F nas IPO pup MOMLINTN TP114 TP116 M V xL BI DATA SI DEZ DATA S 1 89 DATA S 2 HE DATA S 3 TEE 91 9 DATA S 4 aig ci 5 93 DATA SI5 94 DATA SI6 R2 D PATAS 2 k ir DATA S 45 0 e vooe4 TXA1 4 1P05 28 0 25 0 25 BS q TP115 TALK O TP96 C34 TP417 R19 TP124 1 US_CHN_SEL 45 C105
106. DATA 12 55 DATA 13 56 DATA 14 57 DATAL 15 58 59 TP110p e DATAL 15 0 MOM_CSN lt a F217 33 3 5A 671 mora agg TP1s h e LAN CSN LAN_INTN E 4 70 _ y 1P2026 64 GAINTN LAN_DREGN zo 2 70 LAN R205 33 yTPi10p 69 D se DEEN BUSDIR ROMCSN EE LAN FEADYN e M as PE meg TH dus O cm a TP nibus PT ro 75 JO AN 4 3A 4 TC 6 1A V O 76 C144 _ U15 2 1P739 Tia TP196 C103 CD VCC DEN R185 51 SDCLKO F Pre AE TP310 Rist A188 pa 5 i 3 1 T e 196 Y ps Q O GND VOUT MOM_INTN ES SDC R3112N2B1C ad C149 es TRY pupa RZ E 7 Pes yo o O zoa 216 H 7B d A184 4 7k 3 38 TRES TP197 R181 4 7k TP705 R171 SDCSN D r C158 Aisa bg 87 ao T R169 7A A we M S es SDCSI 1k ss TS 3 10 C22P x4 p e R176 SUCS R178 Ca E 3 10 O vs aa tile Dee 85 JS R177 33 neni Em 7 ICI we c f 3 1C ql TP2015 2g 1 5 Aurora v T HE AYS C1 3 p249 ov c r TPIS 5 7 0 6 3 0 1 9 L O vm Aal 2 7 v o R250 92 3 1 2 0 7 80 TP vDD3 O R190 pe 4 O V R189 op TP3 C4152 C403 X FUJITSU U16 ET P o ses ETA Ts aos 30 SPIN SO 4PIN S1 6PIN ENS Fig 3 3 3 3 CHAPTER 3 THEORY OF OPERATION The functions of the interface block communication with external devices are described below 1 32 USB Stores the data received from the PC into DRAM as controlled by the DMA controller The transmission speed is 480Mbps or 12Mbps R165 TP2
107. Does the voltage between pins clutch solenoid 2 solenoid and 1 24V of the Failure of connector CN16 connector on the engine PCB change from approx 24V DC to OV within the specified time 1 Clean the surface of the separation pad or paper pick up roller 2 Replace the separation pad or paper pick up roller Heconnect the connector Replace the engine PCB Replace the paper pick up clutch solenoid Main PCB 4 Is the problem solved by No Replace the main PCB replacing the main PCB M 5 Insufficient output from high voltage power supply unit High voltage 1 Do any of the terminals on the contact high voltage contacts have dirt or contact burns High voltage Check the connections of the power supply connector between the high PCB voltage power supply and the engine PCB are secured correctly 6 21 Clean the terminals Replace the high voltage power supply PCB Reconnect the connector between the high voltage power supply and the engine PCB CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING M 6 Fixing heater temperature failure Poor thermistor harness contact Blown thermal Remove the fixing unit and fuse measure the resistance of the thermal fuse Is it open circuit Thermistor Is the thermistor installed Yes Replace the fixing unit failure properly Reinstall the thermistor properly No Halogen heater Remove the fixing unit and Yes Replace the halogen heater lamp failure measure the resistance of
108. EMS Make sure that the TCP IP protocol of the print server is enabled 8 N If you used rarp make sure that you started the rarp daemon on any workstation using the rarpd rarpd a or equivalent command Verify that the etc ethers file contains the correct Ethernet address and that the print fax server name matches the name in the etc hosts file 4 If you used bootp make sure that you started the bootp daemon on any UNIX workstation and bootp is enabled i e the is removed from the bootp entry in the etc bootptab file is correctly configured 5 Also verify that host computer and the print fax server are either on the same subnet otherwise that the router is properly configured to pass data between the two devices UNIX Troubleshooting 1 Make sure that the etc printcap file if applicable is typed in correctly In particular look for missing and characters because a small error anywhere in the file can have major consequences Also check the usr spool directory to make sure that you have created a valid spool directory 2 If you are using a Linux operating system the X Window Print tool program that is included with Linux may not properly configure the etc printcap file for Ipd operation then you might also edit the etc printcap file and change the following line in the entry for the machine if lp dev null then to Ip 3 If you are using a Berkeley based UNIX make sure that the d
109. L18 DATA4 Te es TP vk su ae a 1698 L19 92 diss YOON 35 ec es G EE Es a i PI 5 Fl eee gege Bt ch T L200 ei AA J p 38 o o f E A108 BI 8 8 Sl ELSEN ENBN amp 2D v B Fig 3 14 3 8 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 1 3 13 Scanner control VDD24 O Se CIS 10 4 48 9 5 C25 c14 35V C104 clad UVR1V100MDA1FA B V 2012 5xL11 ve 9v O RES G5 10k C G4 PHM RDLED B D1858 TP1 TP6 e C43 C39e8 P3100 e TP3101 C104 Bien VSS_IN ASS 30 1w 18 Rea V PITCH 5 1M H 16 5 O V ov R47 1 2012 0 5 RSV O c22 10V cioma J ca SMG10V8 100MFC C104 ROV O L9 1608 R15 mE 2M 5D BLM11B421SPB 51 TP3098 TP61 R14 CIS_TG Ce TP161 c co C10 cap HJ cae ev 0 5 R9 El RSV R TP3099 SL 104081 AO CIS_IN g 3E T C7 cl ARS 1 3 14 Power supply 5V is generated by the 3 pin regulator from astable 7V supplied from the LVPS 5V is used for the IEEE1284 interface the LD PCB and the engine PCB In addition 1 9V is generated by the 3 pin regulator from 3 3V supplied from the LVPS 1 9V is used for the CPU within the ASIC and the logic circuit 16V C100 4 RE3 16V101M F 5xL11 L27 BLM11B1 2SPB Blue NiMH BATTERY 3CELL Fig 3 16 3 9 CHAPTER 3 THEORY OF OPERATION 1 4 Engine PCB The gate array which transforms the serial signal from the main PCB into the parallel signal is mounted on the engine PCB The engine PCB controls
110. Low voltage power suppiv nennen nnne nnne nnn nnn nnns 3 11 1 5 2 High voltage power supply aaanaanaaaaaaaaaaaaa naaa naaanaaannaaaanaaannaaaanaaannanannanannaannnanaaanaaaanaaaanaa 3 12 2 MECHANICS Term 3 13 2 1 Overview of Printing Mechanics ia 3 13 22 Scanner en EE EE 3 14 2 2 1 Document feeding and ejecting mechanism aaaaaiaaaaaaanaananaaaananaaaannaaananaaaananaaa 3 14 Ee EE 3 14 2 F EE eiert 3 15 2 3 FPS ie EE 3 15 292 a AMON E 3 15 233 er E 3 16 A Ee EE 3 17 2 4 1 Document cover sensors aainaaiaaaaaaanaaaaaaanaaanaanuaannannaannaanunannaannaannnanaanunannaananananaanaaanaa 3 17 242 nn e o A 3 17 2 4 3 Cassette sensor Paper empty Sensor nennen nnn nnns 3 18 2 4 4 E ee EE 3 18 2 4 5 Document front sensor Document rear sensor aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaanaaanaaanaaaaaanaaaaaaanaaanaaaaa 3 19 PULO A O a a ue Mc ME 3 19 TABLE OF CONTENTS 75 NES EE 3 20 2 9 1 Photosensitive 0rUM 222 12222 0sssslsblssdassadbei Aere 3 20 202 PIM CAG sasa OT Emm 3 20 A E PO OSOS RRR 3 20 A SA 3 20 SE Toner Carnide esscr iR a Eea e a a kkk 3 20 e LA Ee 3 20 A e e o A 3 20 212 4 8818 o 2 S Ree he ne eee a ee ee 3 21 24 CVO EE 3 22 e MANS S dagen eneeanenesesseo 3 22 A A o AA 3 23 CHAPTER A DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBLY 4 1 1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ninininannanananaaaaaaananaaaanananannananannanannanannnnannnnnnanannnnanannnnann
111. M x 16bit is fitted 1 3 6 SDRAM 30 2 205 16 OKI OKI P2ROM P2ROM y ele Jus Ls A pes pe pe pe per ue se Je eec res e e pe De Ls Jase er nir ovi vi ne Le 64M d 6A 60 3 1E 3 30 4 10 4 5B ch Wa 3 10 Fig 3 7 SDCSN 6A 60 6F 3 1E 3 30 4 10 4 58 468 18 BA 6C 6F 3 1E 3 30 4 10 ES BA 6C 6F 3 1E 3 3C 4 P GA GC 6F 3 1E 3 3C 4 1C D S SDCLK 4C SDCKE 5c ADR 15 gt 4 6B BA 6C 6F 3 1D 3 1E 4 1C 4 SA 5C 6F 3 10 3 1E 4 10 4 SY 4 68 ADR 2 ADR 3 ADRIS 31515 E gt BS BIRR Q 4C 18 RASN GA 6C 6E 3 16 3 20 4 10 eB q DOMO DGM1 FLASH for MAIN PROGRAM av VD030 EF R51 Leen A9 T9103 Y 127 E C228 C101 Pong J ADR 1 25 ADR 2 24 ADAL 4 ADAI6 ADAI7 ADRI8 ADRIS ADRI 10 ADRI 11 Ii uU 35 DATA F 3 38 DATA F 4 40 DATA F S 49 _ DATA F 6 44 _ DATA F 7 30 DATA F 8 32 DATA F S 34 DATA F 10 36 DATA F 11 39 DATA F 12 41 DATA F 13 43 DATA F 14 45 DATA F 15 a D ADR 13 ADR 14 ADRI 16 ADR 17 ADR 18 ADRI 19 ADR 2 ADR 21 1 iil Gm pa QIN MSM29GB32 DATA F 4 SS 38 14 OVDD 17 1 E ao ret Ll sL s ed o o o oso g 37 151 131 5 D 3 B 20 KS 21 mS B O V 2 DATA S 0 4 DATA S 1 23 24 8 DATA S 4 19 DATA SISI 11 DATA S 6 Wir ADRU7 13 mol ADRIS 31 42 DATA SI8 ADR 9
112. MIZING CODES This function allows you to customize the EEPROM according to language function settings and firmware switch settings lt Operating Procedure gt 1 To make the machine enter the maintenance mode press the Menu button 2 8 6 and 4 keys in this order I Within 2 seconds gt The machine beeps for approx one second and displays MN MAINTENANCE EEE on the LCD indicating that it is placed in the initial stage of the maintenance mode a mode in which the machine is ready to accept entry from the keys 2 Press the 7 and 4 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode The current customizing code e g 9001 in the case of MFC8220 U S A version appears 3 Enter the desired customizing code e g 9001 in the case of MFC8220 U S A version The newly entered code appears NOTE The machine does not work properly when an incorrect code is entered 4 Press the Start button The machine saves the setting and returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode If you press the Stop Exit button or no keys are pressed for one minute in the above procedure the machine stops the procedure and returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode lt EEPROM Customizing Codes List gt Models 9001 Versions Pan Nordic Norway Finland Sweden A 1 APPENDIX 2 INSTALLING THE UPDATE DATA APPENDIX 2 INSTALLING THE UPDATE DATA 1 INSTALLING THE UPDATE DATA TO THE MACHINE
113. N e Selector 4 Max pause time allowable for remote ID code detection This selector sets the maximum pause time allowable for detecting the second digit of a remote ID code after detection of the first digit in remote reception If selector 4 is set to 0 2 seconds for instance only a remote ID code whose second digit is detected within 2 seconds after detection of the first digit will become effective so as to activate the remote function A 10 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL e Selectors 5 and 6 Busy tone detection in automatic sending mode These selectors determine whether or not the machine automatically disconnects a line upon detection of a busy tone in automatic sending mode Setting selector 6 to 0 ignores a busy tone so that the machine does not disconnect the line Setting selectors 5 and 6 to 0 and 1 respectively makes the machine detect a busy tone only after dialing and disconnect the line oetting both of selectors 5 and 6 to 1 makes the machine detect a busy tone before and after dialing and then disconnect the line e Selector 7 Busy tone detection in automatic receiving mode This selector determines whether or not the machine automatically disconnects a line upon detection of a busy tone in automatic receiving mode WSW O6 Pause button setting and 2nd dial tone detection Pause button setting and 2nd dial tone detection Detection of 2nd dial tone No of 2nd dial tone detection times 2nd
114. N ev ree oy VV 00 0 USB lt gt FG APPENDIX 4 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Appendix 4 3 Main PCB Circuit Diagram 3 6 DQ 15 6D DIMM CN13 dala lt pa0 eae ss DGG pa 7 2 x37 pata Das Wen 825 lt D013 Da 14 a pai4 DQ 15 EO 0015 a lt Da22 mz 500 oals B8 0024 a en pa 10 9 30026 eegen DG27 uus E DG28 24 D029 Dal 141 5 0020 C pal 15 96 0031 SDSDA D XSDA 1 50 S SDSCL 2 SCL 1 50 Fl GE V O 00 gt SA2 NL E SN RASN E SDCSN2 e Z3 SN1 RASN1 E 1 gt SN2 RASN2 E2 B gt SN3 RASN3 E3 BAL ADR 16 gt D gt BA1 A12 4 6A 1 6C 1 6F 1 78 16 4 10 PRA eb BA A Malas BB gt BA A11 1 6A 1 6C 1 6F 1 7B8 1E 4 1C 4 4 68 evo gt A13 NotUse A15 ADAI 14 20 At2 NotUse M4 ADR 13 EO A11 M13 ADRI 12 B gt A10 AP A1 ADR 11 EZ A9 ADRI 1 AB f de i h i fum nay ss ADR 4 4 gt A2 ADR 3 523 A E ADRI2 Ae ADR 23 1 1 84 1 60 1 85 30 4 10 4 58 4 68 SOMA SDCKE 1 LSC 1 6A 1 60 1 6F 1 74 16 4 10 eye be CASN 1 84 1 60 1 8F 1 74 1E 4 10 4 O A EB WEN 1 64 1 6C 1 6F 1 7A 1E 4 sA E NES 1 4C DOMO 29 1 64 1 60 1 05 1 70 1 4 10 4 54 68 DGM4 1 84 1 60 1 8F 1 7A 1E 4 10 458 4 6B DOG A 1 6A 1 8C 1 6F 1E 4 1C 4 4 6B DGM3 l 1 64 1 60 1 6F 1E 4 10 4 5874 68 v003O esa ese ed cmd cue conl conl cual cal Freon TE eI C103 C103 C103 C103 Ces c103 C103 C103 evo CN13 868888888
115. NORE CI COUNT OFF r ON OFF 18888181 APPEND AN IMAGE ON XMIT REPORT IN PRINTER ERROR DELETE AN IMAGE ON XMIT REPORT AT NEXT TA NOT USED Lr LMI u II LE F3 4 to Cu CO 10 05 CP CO 00 00 Eg E Lu wr PO LO E UI RBEOODPE JADR RPREJJIINHRPEKEODDMUWN H EOIOARKRPECPRPRE KJAHEONRUMNH an 9g Wh X i UI B GER Tt D LO I D D D D D H B Fig 7 4 CHAPTER 7 MAINTENANCE MODE 3 6 Operation Check of LCD Maintenance mode 12 lt Function gt This function allows you to check whether the LCD on the control panel works normally lt Operating Procedure gt 1 Press the 1 and 2 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode The LCD shows 2 Press the Start button Each time you press the Start button the LCD cycles through the displays shown at right The Status lamp also changes from orange red to green each time you press the Start button 3 Press the Stop Exit button in any process of the above display cycle The machine beeps for one second and returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode CO TT TT TT i OOOOOOOCOOGOOOGO pack rea EEEE EEEE EEEE l Back green Fig 7 5 7 12 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 7 Operational Check of Control Panel PCB Maintenance mode 13 lt Function gt This function allows you to check the control panel PCB for normal operation lt Operating Procedure gt 1 Press t
116. PPARAT F AR E USYNLIGE LASERSTR LER HVIS DU ABNER OG SAMTIDIGT BLDKERER L SEN UNDG LASERSTR LERNE KLASSE 3B LASERPRODUKT iPELIGRO EMISI N DE RADIACI N L SER INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ENCUENTRA ABIERTO Y DESBLOQUEADO EVITE LA EXPOSICI N DIRECTA AL HAZ PRODUCTO L SER DE CATEGOR A 3B VAROITUS LATETTAAVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUSTA OHITTAESSA LAITTEESTA LAHTEE NAKYMATONTA LASERSATEILYA VARO ALTISTUMASTA SUORAAN SATEELLE LUOKAN 3 LASERLAITE MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL DEFINITIONS OF WARNINGS CAUTIONS AND NOTES The following conventions are used in this service manual N WARNING Indicates warnings that must be observed to prevent possible personal injury caution Indicates cautions that must be observed to service the printer properly or prevent damage to the printer NOTE Indicates notes and useful tips to remember when servicing the printer Listed below are the various kinds of WARNING messages included in this manual ZN WARNING Always turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord from the power outlet before accessing any parts inside the printer ZN WARNING Some parts inside the printer are extremely hot immediately after the printer is used When opening the front cover or back cover to access any parts inside the printer never touch the shaded parts shown in the following figures If you analyze malfunctions with the power plug inserted into the power outlet special caution shou
117. Paper pick up roller ASSY Roller collar Bush R Fig 4 92 4 Remove the bind B M3x10 Taptite screw and then remove the PE sensor cover 5 Remove the cassette sensor PCB ASSY Taptite bind B M3x10 PE sensor cover Cassette sensor PCB ASSY Fig 4 93 4 51 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 6 Remove the PE actuator and the CA actuator CA actuator PE actuator Fig 4 94 7 Remove the spring extension P R from the gear 63P R 8 Remove the gear 63P R 9 Remove the ground wire from the conductor bearing Hint Make sure to mount the extension spring P R and the ground wire in proper positions upon assembly If they are mounted in improper positions tension fails to be applied to the sector gear 63 P R and it might cause a feeding failure Conductor bearing Hooks 3 Ground wire Spring extension P R Fig 4 95 4 52 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 10 Remove the bush L from the P R shaft 11 Remove the P R shaft P R shaft Bush L Fig 4 96 12 Remove the idle gear 22 13 Remove the middle roller gear 14 Remove the bind B M3x10 taptite screw and the conductor bearing 15 Remove the 1st F R shaft KZ d a Frame Middle roller gear R S ec Conductor bearing O E Taptite bind B M3x10 Fig 4 97 4 53 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 16 Remove the two cup S M3x6 Taptite screws and the four bind B M4x12 Taptite screws
118. Pro Suite you will first have to uninstall it From the Start menu select Programs Brother Brother MFL Pro Suite Uninstall and then follow the instructions on the screen 2 18 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 14 When the Brother Software License Agreement window appears click Yes 15 Select Local Interface and then click Next 16 Select Standard and then click Next The application files will be copied to your computer NOTE If you want to install the PS Brother PostScript driver select Custom and then follow the on screen instructions When the Select Components screen appears check PS Printer Driver and then continue following the on screen instructions lt For Windows 95 98 98SE Me Users Only gt Make sure that you followed the instructions in 1 to 16 on pages 2 18 to 2 19 17 When this screen appears connect the parallel interface cable to your PC and then connect it to the machine Plug the machine into the AC power outlet Turn the power switch on Caution Do not plug the power cord before connecting the parallel interface cable lt may cause damage to your machine 18 Click Next 19 The README file will be displayed Please read this file for troubleshooting information and then close the file to continue installation 20 Check the Run On Line Registration and then click Next 21 Click Finish to restart your computer 22 After the computer restarts the installation of t
119. SLW15R 1C7 L C da VET Pao bn ed 25 TE esp my RSTN Ld d d d dd R14 200 24 3 ai C102 u ou ja o io a y Io Y Y Y YU ja yw qu PCLK O SOV SOV 52089 1420 Tepa 9M la isis 18 18 ls Is IS IS IS iC 8s TRI R16 100 W Reo o jo jo jo JO jo jo fo jo yO jo 0 jo jo jo i8 MAIN SD_IN E MAIN SD OUT LCD CONTA m 4 7k Pot d II C104 UPD65880GB 231 8ES 21 in R ab c uber HET Sava 65 12 Rey E d C101 9 C26 S 4 TPE2 u Suv C102 T TP64 p1 14 F W MCN LCD_CONTB eov 5v AM o DTC114YUA Re S suv 120 m SC Vf MIN 21 V s v O 29 o O Sv NS R1 If MAX s v O o o 0 sov 120 5 0Vx1 05 1 V 24 Q x 95 18 7mA TP4 b 18 7mAx18 7mAx 24 Q x 95 798W pone PH A 71 12 SW MAX D Ic 3 3V 68k Q LZ VI 48 5 A Ce E N Se ee7V K Sev 1 2 3 A 4 5 6 A 58 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL Appendix 4 12 Low voltage Power Supply PCB Circuit Diagram A 59 APPENDIX 4 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Appendix 4 13 High voltage Power Supply PCB Circuit Diagram 100V l E EI E S o 9 o o Op Oz C419 R407 R406 R438 R405 C402 Y R413 S R412 C415 C a Raa RAO t 1 V C417 R443 R445 R444 C416 Eo D D TIPY opp C418 C410 D406 y EN Cj d 2 Sev R437 v gt o Q405 E R436 D407 D 407 C413 D414 K R450
120. TENANCE 7 Mount the rear cover C using the bind B M4x12 Taptite screw Rear cover C Taptite bind B M4x12 Fig 5 24 8 Insert the paper tray ES OS A Front cover ASSY vl 5 Paper Tray Fig 5 25 5 14 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 9 Insert the power cord to the machine Machine K Power cord lt Fig 5 26 9 15 CHAPTER 5 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2 2 Paper Feeding Kit lt Disassembly Procedure gt 1 Disconnect the power cord from the machine lt gt Machine SS R Fig 5 27 Power cord X 2 Close the front cover ASSY and pull out the paper tray B SEN Front cover ASSY EN Paper tray Fig 5 28 9 16 N O O P NA ll mes 3 Remove the pad holder and the separation pad spring from the paper tray Pad holder Separation pad spring N ff N N 7 e UF NS N LY R Sa OS Fig 5 29 Turn the machine over Remove the bush R Remove the paper pick up roller ASSY Remove the two roller collars from the paper pick up roller ASSY Roller collar Paper pick up roller ASSY Roller collar Bush R Fig 5 30 9 17 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL CHAPTER 5 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE lt Assembly Procedure gt 1 Mount the two roller collars to the paper pick up ASSY 2 Mount the paper pick up roller ASSY 3 Mount the bush R 4 4 Turn the machine back to the original orientation Roller collar Pa
121. TP301e ig 1C C104 6 R127 ap 2 x2 oa R128 V CH 1 M c112 He cur TP517 TP3013 48 E 607 ONDE R 82k R124 100k Ziel C101 O ev PIN FB PC3 FB_MOT_SEL NO USE PCS EARTH EARTH PREGL ic POS ALARM G PDS MO E EL_VOL1 1C PD7 RMOT_ENAB _ TEL_VOL2 pos Posen2__ Jee AINTN 1 8 PDS DECAY TELL PD1 HS TXD US CHN SEL PD11 US JPN SEL US JPN SEL PD12 CCD SEL 12V ADLC pei HS AXD ree opsena wo pea sen sesn mouse Pea sen asen no use O VDD1 8 ces NCU CI C104 6 78 C94 o ev T ov O V0D1 8 c102 C104 O ov O VDD1 8 C113 C104 ev O O ov O VDD1 8 C145 STEN IN 0 78 R121 C104 dk 1 1F O ov TP522 R118 O VDD1 8 Be C107 1 4 F C104 d ov O v 3 ANALOG STHM we 23 O VDD1 8 cos C102 c97 ciai vDD3 1 ov O V rn D3 FB751V 40 va LH O LEDVSS IN ee cae C104 O ov O vm c84 R VO C104 Pa 3V OQ O ov De ONUS NRB751V 40 R105 9 5 C111 CIS IN C104 e ANALOG T 1 4 oy c81 O V C47P O VDD3 Do38 C117 C104 C10h 104 O ov D4 RB751V 40 TP3089 u12 3 2 DD 4 1 C105 TP1 15 GND C103 AGSRW1 9C pi C104 o ov ORION RTCRSTN VIH 1 5 2 V FESETIC VOH VDD3 RON X Tout VOH max 1 91V VOH min 1 69V STHAM ces C101 144PIN QFP AA i kA WEE SEO ESE EEN 140 S VOD24 139 eec MU 138 6 8D eg CNI 23 TP3053 SPKR_ONN 136 6 5F NCU2_CHAG 6 7E 124 35V Nc CMH 104 tas a N
122. Try installing DIMM into Replace the main PCB PCB failure another machine and then check the memory size in Print Settings Is it possible to print the data Replace the DIMM P 3 Headers or footers are not printed out even though they are viewed on PC screen User Check Most laser machines have a restricted area that cannot be printed on Usually the first two lines and last two lines of text cannot print leaving 62 printable lines Adjust the top and bottom margins in your document to allow for this The machine sometimes prints a couple of characters and then ejects the page User Check For DOS environment only The application machine emulation setting and the machine s emulation do not match Check in the application software which machine you have selected to make sure the machine is set up correctly Remember that the machine emulates widely used machine selections HP Laser Jet 6P Brother BR Script Level 3 Epson FX 850 IBM Proprinter XL Try setting the machine into HP emulation and then select the HP LaserJet 6P machine in the application software 6 52 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 10 NETWORK PROBLEM 10 1 If the error related to network occurs refer to the following sections Installation Problem If you cannot print over the network check the following 1 2 Make sure that the machine is powered on is on line and ready to print Verify that the machine and the configura
123. U UVRIVIGOMDALFA vada NCU RNG 5xL11 121 6 30 Ser SPKALVOLA 123 6 4F L11 1608 SPKR_VOL3 re 33 6 4F 34 6 7D E Sepp TEL VOL4 TEL_VOL2 118 pm 5 50 HRAD 119 ES NCU_TEL 32 65 38 v R v wW 48B R 2 pS N v PITCH 5 4M 120 sa US H 16 5 128 Se NUR ADLC ev ev BS_SO R47 2012 0 5 et NCU RING PEN 5v 6 4D mm Si 29 10V coos ge PMOT_PHA SMG1 VB 1 MFC C104 28 6 gE AMOT_PHB Rov see AMOT_PHAB gE DOT DER 25 csak BLM118421SPB VFEF A EE 25 VPEF_B CIS TG EE 18 Els TP3 S2 ES C ET TP3093 2 u Geen TC74VFCT ELEM PWM_ROLED 10 68 e US TP529 477306 TC74VHCTOBAFT ov 7 PM PAM_REFL 6 PW 47 Rea 3 3k Ziel A 5 MOTOR VER mh us ES OTOR DRIVEI o gt CD ema Se SEN TC7AVFCTOBAFT CES cos C104 v O R V O VOD24 o cas OR3 3V x 1 ces c91 o 50104 ECA1VHG104 BLM11B601SPB P3062 ue TC7AVHCTOBAFT CIS TG TP3063 C104 R1 R1 1 5 V 2012 Rev YF a 6xL11 O 06 p PI PITCH 2 5mm D2114K B 7 D LREFH 39 0 5 El TP38 TP40 TP36 C66 B2k R87 C104 38 C104 4k BE TMF Ce ee Ee PITCH 5 H 16 5 ij ev PMOT PHA P o Pov AMOT_PHAB Es DOT DG R3 3V E E A as 10k ETA 4D R73 IEKTA1L F lo mae Ce SES Ee TEA D 75 E TP39 B y TT ees T P104 IEA Im l E R1 6 C104 Zei ene css Tout max Vref Rs 0 015 P91 fb axle c76 eh R76 638A R MOT V En 10 8 R96 5 Ek be 10 8 5 Ek AXI RV PITCH 5 H 16 5 Gy HF POV STH
124. You must wait for a while for it to For A While or toner cartridge is too hot The cool down machine will pause its current print job and go in to cooling down mode During the cooling down mode you will hear the cooling fan running while the display on the machine shows Cooling Down and Wait For A While Cover Open PLS The front cover was not Close the front cover for the drum Close Cover completely closed unit Disconnected The other party or other party s fax Try to transmit or receive again machine terminated the call Machine Error XX Machine has a mechanical Refer to 2 2 Error Codes Shown in problem the MACHINE ERROR X X message 6 4 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL Out of Memory You cannot store data In the memory Fax sending in process Press Stop Exit button and wait until the other operations in progress finish and then try again OR Clear the data in the memory Copy operation in process Press Stop Exit button and wait until the other operations in process finish and then try again OR Clear the data in the memory OR Add an optional memory Printing operation in process Reduce print resolution OR Clear the data in the memory OR Add an optional memory No The number you dialed does not Verify the number and try again Response Busy answer or is busy Not Registered PLS Open Cover You tried to access a One Touch or Speed Dia
125. ace of the photosensitive drum Toner Cartridge Develops the electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive drum with toner and forms the visible image Print Process Charging The drum is charged to approximately 870V by an ion charge which is generated by the primary charger The charge is generated by ionization of the corona wire which has a DC bias from the high voltage power supply applied to it The flow of the ion charge is controlled by the grid to ensure it is distributed evenly on the drum surface The aluminum drum sleeve in the photosensitive drum is grounded Aluminum drum sleeve Photosensitive Organic photoconductor layer drum Voltage regulator HVPS Corona wire Fig 3 30 The primary charge uses a corona wire but since the drum is positively charged only less than 1 10 of the usual quantity of ozone is generated compared with the negatively charged drum The level of ozone expelled from the printer is therefore not harmful to the human body Applicable safety standards have been complied with 3 20 2 7 2 Exposure stage MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL After the drum is positively charged it is exposed to the light emitted from the laser unit Drum Laser detector Laser diode Paper Laser beam f O lens Laser beam Polygon mirror Motor Fig 3 31 The area exposed to the laser beam is the image to be printed The surface potential of the exposed area is reduced forming the
126. aemon is started on Berkeley based systems with the command Ipc start machine where machine is the name of the local print queue 4 If you are using an AT amp T based UNIX make sure the machine is enabled enable machine where machine is the name of the local print queue 5 Make sure that the Ipr lpd remote line machine service are running on the host computer refer to your host computer documentation for information on how to do this 6 If text or PCL jobs are run together try setting the service remote machine with EOT set to string number 2 lt ESC gt E For example SET SERVICE BRN xxxxxx P1 EOT 2 6 55 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 10 5 10 6 10 7 7 If PostScript jobs fail to print or are run together try setting the service remote machine with EOT set to string number 3 control D For example SET SERVICE BRN xxxxxx P1 EOT 3 8 If the lines of a text file are staggered make sure that you have specified a remote printer rp name of TEXT in your etc printcap file 9 If you are using Sun Solaris V2 4 or earlier there is a bug which causes long print jobs to fail when using a print fax server If you are having trouble printing long jobs over 1MB add the line mx 0 to your etc printcap file entry 10 If you cannot print from DEC TCP IP Service for VMS UCX make sure that you have version 2 0B or later of this software because earlier versions will not work with Brother print fax servers
127. ailure ooftware bug 2 Does this problem appear Inform the Brother office of when printing specific data or the used specific data printing under a specific machine condition and environment system environment Engine PCB failure Fixing unit 1 Is the ground wire on the fixing oecure the ground wire ground wire unit secured with the shoulder correctly with the shoulder connection screw correctly screw Harness Is the connection of the No Reconnect the connectors connection connector between the main securely failure PCB and the engine PCB connected correctly Engine PCB 3 Is the problem solved by No Replace the engine PCB failure replacing the engine PCB Main PCB Is the problem solved by No Replace the main PCB failure replacing the main PCB M 14 DIMM failure DIMM failure 1 Try installing DIMM into Yes Replace the main PCB another machine then check the memory size in Print Settings Is it possible to print the data Replace the DIMM 6 23 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 TROUBLESHOOTING OF THE CONTROL PANEL L 1 Nothing is displayed on the LCD User Check 1 Verify if the power switch is turned off Step Connection Main PCB and control panel Fix the connector properly between main PCB are properly connected PCB and control panel PCB Harness between main PCB and control panel PCB Connection between main PCB and low voltage power supply PCB Harness between main PCB and low
128. al Ci for a time length which is greater than the value set by selectors 1 and 2 and less than the value set by selectors 3 and 4 it interprets the Ci signal as OFF e Selectors 5 and 6 Detecting time setting These selectors set the time length required to make the machine acknowledge itself to be called That is if the machine continuously detects calling signals with the frequency set by selectors 1 through 4 of WSW14 during the time length set by these selectors 5 and 6 it acknowledges the call A 18 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL WSW13 Modem setting Cable equalizer Modem attenuator 1 2 3 Reception level 5 8 The modem should be adjusted according to the user s line conditions e Selectors 1 and 2 Cable equalizer These selectors are used to improve the pass band characteristics of analogue signals on a line Attenuation in the high band frequency is greater than in the low band frequency Set these selectors according to the distance from the telephone switchboard to the machine e Selectors 3 and 4 Reception level These selectors set the optimum receive signal level e Selectors 5 through 8 Modem attenuator These selectors are used to adjust the transmitting level of the modem when the reception level at the remote station is improper due to line loss This function applies to G3 protocol signals Setting two or more selectors to 1 produces addition of attenuation assigned to each selector
129. ality and life of the machine itself It may also cause serious damage to the performance and life of a genuine Brother drum unit Warranty cover is not applied to problems caused by the use of 3rd party toner or toner cartridges Brother strongly recommends that you do not refill the toner cartridge provided with the machine We also strongly recommend that you continue to use only Genuine Brother Brand replacement toner cartridges Using or attempting to use potentially incompatible toner and or toner cartridges in the machine may cause damage to the machine itself and or it may result in unsatisfactory print quality Make sure that the wire cleaner on the drum unit is returned to the home position 4 mark position before re installing the drum unit into the machine or printed pages may have vertical stripes Refer to Fig 5 12 Install the toner cartridge immediately after you remove the protective cover Do not touch the development roller and photosensitive drum shaded as shown below NOTE It is recommended to clean the machine when you replace the toner cartridge Refer to subsection 3 PERIODICAL CLEANING in this Chapter 5 6 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 2 PERIODICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS Periodical replacement parts are the parts to be replaced periodically to maintain product quality These parts would affect the product quality greatly if they lost their function even if they do not appear to be damaged or there is no c
130. and then click Next 21 Click Finish to restart your computer 22 After the computer restarts the installation of the Brother drivers will automatically start Follow the instructions on the screen 23 If the Digital Signature Not Found dialog boxes appear click Yes to install the driver 24 Click Yes to have the Control Center loaded each time Windows is started The Control Center will appear as an icon in the task tray If you click No the Scan key on the machine will be disabled NOTE Even if you select NO you will be able to launch the Brother Control Center later to use the Scan key by double clicking the Smart Ul icon on the desktop This loads the Brother Control Center to the task tray See AutoLoad the Brother Control Center Chapter 4 in the Documentation Software User s Guide located on the CD ROM OK A Basic Universal printer driver was installed with the MFL PRO Software Suite which is certified for use with Windows operating systems Brother also offers a fully featured printer driver Native driver that includes more features than the Basic Universal driver However this driver does not include a Windows certificate To install the Brother Native driver proceed to step 25 NOTE For details on what features are available see chapter 2 of the Software User s Guide Brother Native driver Installation 25 Click Start and select Settings and then Printers Click on Add Printer and the Add Prin
131. ather thick plain TE _ EE paper Post card o extra thick paper Plain paper or rather thick plain A4 or SR paper Envelope thick envelope thin envelope Thick paper Post card o extra thick paper 1 5 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 2 Size E Paper tray Tray 1 Manual feed tray Lower tray Tray 2 A4 Letter JIS B5 ISO B5 Horizontal A4 Letter JIS B5 ISO B5 ISO ISO B6 A5 A6 Legal 69 8 to 220 0mm B6 A5 Legal Executive Executive Vertical 116 0 to 406 0mm 3 Other specifications In the case of Paper Tray Plain paper Reoyclea paper 4 to 6 of weight lt In the case of Manual Feed Tray gt Plain paper Weight 60 to 161g m 75 to 90g m equivalent to one sheet Thickness 0 08 to 0 2mm 0 084 to 0 12mm equivalent to one sheet Moisture content 4 to 696 of weight 4 to 696 of weight 4 Recommended paper Plain Paper Plain paper Xerox 4200 20lb Hammermill Laser Paper 24lb Transparency 3M CG 3300 Labels Avery laser label 5160 caution When you are choosing print media be sure to follow the information given below to prevent any paper jams print quality problems or machine damage It is recommended to use long grained paper for the best print quality If short grained paper is being used it might be the cause of paper jams Use neutral paper Do not use acid paper to avoid any damage to the drum unit Avoid using coated paper such as vinyl coated paper Avoid
132. atically draws in documents e Selectors 4 through 6 Periodical correction intervals of the reference voltage applied to white level compensation for document scanning during standby Not used These selectors set the correction intervals in seconds of the reference voltage to be applied to white level compensation for document scanning during standby as well as determining whether or not the controller makes the reference voltage correction during standby Conventionally the correction has been made immediately before the start of actual scanning This function takes effect in copying Making the correction during standby may shorten the preparation time for copying NOTE Do not access these selectors e Selector 7 Standby position of the CIS unit Not used This selector determines whether the standby position of the CIS unit should be the CIS lock position home position or the location of the white level reference film attached to the inside of the scanner top cover If the location of the reference film is selected the CIS unit will not return to the lock position so as to shorten the travel time decreasing the preparation time for copying A 45 APPENDIX 3 FIRMWARE SWITCHS WSW WSW46 Monitor of PC ON OFF state Disabled 1 a Monitor SELECT IN D Monitoring the PC ON OFF state Monitor STROBE Monitor both SELECT IN and STROBE 3 Parallel port output pins kept at high 0 Enabled 1 Disabled level Scann
133. ation system to prevent omission of training signals Prefixing an EP tone is effective when the machine fails to transmit at the V 29 modem speed and always has to fall back to 4800 bps transmission e Selectors 2 and 3 Overseas communications mode These selectors should be used if the machine malfunctions in overseas communications According to the communications error state select the signal specifications oetting selector 2 to 1 allows the machine to use 1100 Hz CED signal instead of 2100 Hz in receiving operation This prevents malfunctions resulting from echoes since the 1100 Hz signal does not disable the echo suppressor ES while the 2100 Hz signal does oetting selector 3 to 1 allows the machine to ignore a DIS signal sent from the called station once in sending operation This operation suppresses echoes since the first DIS signal immediately follows a 2100 Hz CED which disables the ES so that it is likely to be affected by echoes in the disabled ES state However such a disabled ES state will be removed soon so that the second and the following DIS signals are not susceptible to data distortion due to echoes Note that some models when called may cause error by receiving a self outputted DIS e Selectors 8 CNG detection on off If this selector is set to 1 the machine detects a CNG signal according to the condition preset by selectors 2 and 3 of WSW18 after a line is connected f it is set to 0 the machine detect
134. audible alarm continuous beeping for approximately 4 seconds and shows the error message on the LCD For the error message see below Error Message Cause Action Change Drum The drum unit is near the end of Use the drum unit until you have a Soon its life print quality problem then replace the drum unit with a new one The drum counter was not reset 1 Open the front cover and then press Clear Back button 2 Press 1 key to reset Check Original The originals were not inserted or See Original jams on page 6 11 fed properly or original scanned from ADF was longer than about 36 inches 90cm Check Paper The machine is out of paper or Refill the paper in the paper tray or Check Paper 1 paper is not properly loaded in the MP tray paper tray OR Check Paper 2 Remove the paper and load it again Check Paper MF Paper in the manual feed tray runs Reload paper out Check Paper Size When you see this error the Either load the appropriate size paper in the paper tray does not paper or change the default setting match the paper size you set in Menu bution 1 key and 3 key Comm Error Poor phone line quality caused Try the call again If problem communication error continues call Telephone Company to check your phone line Connection Fail You tried to poll a fax machine Verify the other party s polling that is not in Polled Waiting mode setup Cooling Down Wait The temperature of the drum unit
135. ause of a recording system failure NOTE The maximum number of files to be transferred at a time is 99 If there are 100 files or more you need to perform this function more than once If both color data and monochrome data exist monochrome data is transferred first If the receiving end does not support color color data cannot be transferred resulting in an error lt Operating Procedure gt 1 2 Press the 5 and 3 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode The FAX TRANSFER will appear on the LCD Press the 1 key to display the number of received documents The 1 NO OF JOBS will appear Press the Set button and then the number of received documents is displayed e g NO OF JOBS 10 Press the 2 key to transmit an activity report The 2 ACTIVITY will appear Press the 3 key to transfer received data It is transferred with an activity report attached The 3 DOCUMENTS will appear If no received data exists NO DOCUMENT will appear Press the Set button while the 2 ACTIVITY or 3 DOCUMENTS is displayed The ENTER NO amp SET will appear Enter a phone number of the receiving end to which data will be transferred and then press the Set button NOTE Be sure to enter a phone number directly from the numeric keypad One touch dialing functions cannot be used for this function The ACCEPTED is displayed for approx 2 sec and then the mac
136. bearing 25 projection Heat roller 25 boss CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y e When re assembling the heat roller 25 to the FU frame upper ensure you do not damage the heat roller 25 with the four separate claw ASSY on the FU frame upper Heat roller 25 Separate claw ASSY Separate claw ASSY FU frame upper Fig 4 72 18 Remove the pressure roller 25 e Pressure roller 25 FU jam remove cover K f Fig 4 73 4 40 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 19 Remove the three cleaner spring S 20 Remove the three cleaner pinch roller ASSY S 21 Remove the cleaner spring L 22 Remove the cleaner pinch roller ASSYL Cleaner spring S Cleaner spring L Ju Cleaner pinch roller ASSY S Cleaner spring S J H Cleaner pinch roller ASSY L Lt Cleaner pinch roller ASSY S AY SP E Sy A ALS gt b K r FU frame lower Fig 4 74 NOTE e When re assembling the cleaner pinch roller ASSY complete with the cleaner spring onto the FU frame lower ensure the direction of the roller is correct referring to the figure above e Ensure that the both springs are seated correctly in the locating channel and does not protrude from either end e Ensure also that the proper spring is fixed to the each cleaner pinch roller ASSY because the both springs are NOT identical with each other Cleaner spring Cleaner pinch roller ASSY Me AB FU frame lower Fig 4 75 4 41 CH
137. c7ic 59ec7be 5S8ecTb1 SSgecT7TE me 58ec 7 1 Eer E ms D ecd 53ec6clG 5dec 7 5SecBc2D 59sc77 53ecbc3A BSSec Tt 5SecbcdH 598ec t 5decbcaB B5Sgec T 59ecEc6H 59ec77t bgece n gt BEC 59ec ecife Sec a 59ec77t 598c GE i oc Se BOecIo28 EC fc 59ec A 5decT e 5der Dec 72379 596067249 Ee 59ec7258 58ec S59ec i264 5Gec 59ec7270 58ec 5Yec7284 53ec 59ec7290 5gec 59ec 7220 REPA B9sec72hH Edec BSec72c8 ESec 59ec 27dH bsc 5gec 72eH Boec BSec 2fH S 5decT3BB 59 59ec7318 Bacc 58sc7328 Saec 59207338 S8ec Dec 349 58ec 59807359 59ec 7368 59ec73780 59ec7388 5980771 Fig 7 2 7 6 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 3 ADF Performance Test Maintenance mode 08 lt Function gt The machine counts the documents fed by the automatic document feeder ADF and displays the count on the LCD for checking the ADF performance lt Operating Procedure gt 1 Set documents Allowable up to the ADF capacity The DOC READY will appear on the LCD 2 Press the 0 and 8 keys in this order While counting the documents the machine feeds them in and out displaying the current count on the LCD as shown below ADF CHECK P 01 Current count 1st page in this example 3 To return the machine to the initial stage of the maintenance mode press the Stop Exit button 7 7 CHAPTER 7 MAINTENANCE MODE 3 4 Test Pattern 1 Maintenance mode 09 Function
138. ccess all of those selectors but you may allow them to access user accessible selectors which are shaded in the firmware switch tables in Appendix 3 The service personnel should instruct end users to follow the procedure given below 1 Press the Menu and Enlarge Reduce button in this order NOTE The Enlarge Reduce button does not work when the machine s in the retry mode or the timer function is set 2 Press the 0 key 3 Enter the desired function code 10 11 12 54 80 82 87 or 91 with the numerical keys For function code 10 access the desired firmware switch according to the operating procedure described in Appendix 3 4 To make the machine return to the standby state press the Stop Exit button MFC8220 Enlarge Reduce button Menu button MULTI FUNCTION CENTER Print 809 Clear Back Menu Mz o Fax copY DEF Secure Job Cancel Copy Fax Scan Enlarge Hook ABC Reduce E o C2 9 3 amp Search Redial cial KL pili Quality Options Speed Dial Pause PQRS TUV WXYZ 5 Start Stop Exit D OQO 0 key Stop Exit button Fig 7 1 7 3 CHAPTER 7 MAINTENANCE MODE 3 3 1 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF MAINTENANCE MODE FUNCTIONS EEPROM Parameter Initialization Maintenance mode 01 91 lt Function gt The machine initializes the parameters user switches and firmware switches registered in the EEPROM to the initial values Entering the function cod
139. chanism power developing transferring and heat fixing processes supplies Electrical charger Laser unit including the polygon motor Laser sensitive drum Developer roller Transfer roller Heater roller Main motor Provided on models supporting facsimile function Fig 3 1 3 1 CHAPTER 3 THEORY OF OPERATION 1 2 Main PCB Block Diagram Fig 3 2 shows the block diagram of the main PCB CPU Core Reset Circuit SPARClite 133MHz INT Address Decoder Program Font ROM DRAM Control 1MB 4MB 8MB Network Program 1 5 MB STRAGE 0 5 MB RAM 4MB 8MB 16MB RAM DIMM max 128MB Soft Support EEPROM 512 x 8 bit 8192 x 8 bit EEPROM 1 O To Engine PCB CIS unit 9 scanner Controller PCI Bus Control Fig 3 2 3 2 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 1 3 Main PCB For the entire circuit diagram of the main PCB see APPENDIX 4 1 to 4 6 MAIN PCB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM in this manual 1 3 1 CPU A Fujitsu 32bit RISC CPU SPARClite is built in the ASIC While the CPU is driven with a clock frequency of 66 66 MHz in the user logic block it itself runs at 133 33 MHz which is generated by multiplying the source clock by two 3 a 30 4 10 4 58 4 68 7 78 3 1D 3 DATA 40 DATA 1 DATA 2 42 DATA 3 DATA 4 DATA 5 DATA 6 DATA 7 47 DATA 8 dT EN D z dT DATAI 9 43 DATA 10 53 DATA 11 sa
140. chine automatically steps down to the next highest speed and attempts to establish the transmission link again The machine repeats this sequence while stepping down the transmission speed to the last choice specified by selectors 4 through 6 If the modem always falls back to a low transmission speed e g 4 800 bps set the first transmission speed choice to the lower one e g modify it from 12 000 bps to 7 200 bps in order to deactivate the high speed modem function and reduce the training time for shorter transmission time Generally to save the transmission time set the last transmission speed choice to a higher one e Selector 7 V 34 mode This selector determines whether or not the machine communicates with the remote station in the V 34 mode when that station supports the V 34 mode A 25 APPENDIX 3 FIRMWARE SWITCHS WSW WSW20 Overseas communications mode setting EP tone prefix 0 OFF o oa communications mode 0 2100 Hz 1 1100 Hz Reception Transmission Min time length from reception of CFR to start of transmission of video signals Chattering noise elimination at Yes When CNG goes either detection of CNG ON or OFF Yes Only when CNG goes OFF No 1 V 7 No NES CNG detection on off 0 OFF 1 ON EP Echo protection e Selector 1 EP tone prefix oetting this selector to 1 makes the machine transmit a 1700 Hz echo protection EP tone immediately preceding training in V 29 modul
141. ck Install and PaperPort will start installing on your computer When the PaperPort 8 0 SE Registration screen is displayed make your selection and follow the on screen instructions Click Finish to complete installation 13 When the Brother MFL Pro Suite Installation window appears click Next NOTE e f an error message appears at this point in the installation process or if you have previously installed the MFL Pro Suite you will first have to uninstall it e From the Start menu select Programs Brother Brother MFL Pro Suite Uninstall and then follow the instructions on the screen 14 When the Brother Software License Agreement window appears click Yes CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND BASIC OPERATION 15 Select Local Interface and then click Next 16 Select Standard and then click Next The application files will be copied and installed to your computer NOTE e f you want to install the PS Brother PostScript driver select Custom and then follow the on screen instructions e When the Select Components screen appears check PS Printer Driver and then continue following the on screen instructions lt For Windows 98 98SE Me Users Only gt Make sure that you followed the instructions in 1 to 16 on pages 2 13 to 2 14 17 When this screen appears connect the USB interface cable to your PC and then connect it to the machine Plug the machine into the AC power outlet Turn the power switch on
142. cted Connection between main PCB and NCU PCB Harness between main PCB and NCU PCB Connection between main PCB and control panel PCB Harness between main PCB and control panel PCB Connection of FPC key FPC key Harness wire is damaged Replace the harness with a normal part Main PCB and control panel PCB are properly connected Fix the connection properly Harness wire is damaged Replace the harness with a normal part FPC key is properly N connected Replacement of FPC key Y solves the problem Replacement of NCU PCB solves the problem Replacement of control panel Y PCB solves the problem Replacement of main PCB Y solves the problem Fix the connection properly normal part a normal part Replace the control panel a normal part NCU PCB Control panel PCB Main PCB O es es es es mb 6 26 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL F 2 Speed dialing and One touch dialing can t be used Speed dialing 1 A fax transmission can be Replace the main PCB One touch made using the key ten dialing Dialing mode 2 Dialing signal PB or DP setting comes out normally in each mode Use telephone line emulator Check the dialing mode setting at customer s again Check the telephone line cord between machine and socket Fix the connection properly Connection 3 Main PCB and NCU PCB are between main PCB and NCU PCB Harness 4 Harness wire is damaged Replace the harness w
143. cting or disconnecting cable connectors hold the connector body not the cables If the connector has a lock release the connector lock first to release it 8 After a repair check not only the repaired portion but also all connectors Also check that other related portions are functioning properly before operational checks 4 1 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND HE ASSEMBLY 2 DISASSEMBLY FLOW POWER CORD ech i TOP COVER ASSY k N DRUM UNIT FRONT COVER ASSY k al PAPER TRAY LASER UNIT REAR COVER C BASE PLATE LV INSULATION SHEET 18 ENGINE PCB ASSY i ACCESS COVER BATTERY ASSY 16 CONTROL PANEL ASSY MAIN PCB ASSY HIGH VOLTAGE PS PCB ASSY DOCUMENT SCANNER LOW VOLTAGE PS PCB ASSY i NO OUTER CHUTE PAPER FEEDER N z O C 13 22 24 REAR COVER L R FRAME L DRIVE UNIT FAN MOTOR 60 UNIT LV FAN MOTOR 60 UNIT ch N 3 SIDE COVER L R gt FIXING UNIT THERMISTOR ASSY 25 FRAME R 4 N MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE 3 1 Power Cord 1 Disconnect the power cord from the machine Machine SS Power cord Fig 4 1 3 2 Drum Unit 1 Open the front cover ASSY and remove the drum unit Drum unit Front cover ASSY Fig 4 2 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 3 3 Paper Tray 1 Close the front cover ASSY and pull out the paper tray 2 Remove the paper from the paper tray Front cover ASSY Paper tray
144. ctuator Document pressure bar Document ejection roller ASSY ADF document output support Document take in roller ASSY Separation roller ASSY Pinch rollers Pressure rollers CIS unit Fig 3 20 Document feeding and ejecting mechanism This mechanism consists of the ADF document support automatic document feeder ADF document ejection roller ASSY and document sensors For details about the sensors refer to Section 2 4 If you set documents on the ADF document support with their faces down and start scanning operation then the scanner motor rotates so that the ADF which consists of the document take in roller ASSY nip related parts separation roller ASSY and ADF parts feeds those documents into the equipment starting from the bottom sheet first page to the top last page page by page Each document advances with the document feed roller ASSY to the scanner and then it is fed out of the equipment with the document ejection roller ASSY Scanner The scanner uses a contact image sensor CIS unit which consists of an LED array illuminating documents a self focus lens array collecting the reflected light a CIS PCB carrying out photoelectric conversion to output picture element data and a cover glass on which a document advance When the document passes between the document pressure bar and the cover glass it is scanned MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 2 3 Paper Transfer 2 3 1 Paper supply The paper pick up
145. d below are required Meanwhile the LOW setting is fixed and cannot be adjusted lt Operating Procedure gt 1 Insert the telephone cord to the line terminal LINE of the machine and to the telephone jack Lift the handset and verify that a dial tone is heard If the handset volume is not appropriate go on to the next procedure In the initial stage of the maintenance mode press the 1 key and the 6 key in this order The present handset volume level the default setting HIGH is displayed on the LCD as shown below LOW HEEE HIGH Fig 7 7 If the volume level displayed on the LCD is the one shown below change the setting to the one the default setting HIGH as shown in the above 3 by using the up arrow key and the down arrow key LOW HE HIGH Fig 7 8 UN Up arrow key L Down arrow key Fig 7 9 Press the Start button The machine enters the handset volume adjustment mode and the PWM duty ratio is displayed at the right side of the LCD As hearing a dial tone from the handset adjust the handset volume to appropriate volume by using the 1 3 4 and 6 keys 1 key Turn up the volume by 10H 3 key Increase the volume by 10H 4 key Turn up the volume by 1H 6 key Increase the volume by 1H When the handset volume is adjusted to appropriate volume press the Set button to set the volume setting Then PWM SETTING is displayed on the LCD and the display returns to the state as shown
146. d the document tray open sensor detects the open state then the controller will make correction of the reference voltage to be applied to white level compensation for document scanning before the Copy button is pressed These selectors determine how long compensation data obtained beforehand will keep effective A 44 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL WSW45 Speeding up scanning 2 3 No automatic drawing in 1 sec 2 sec 3 Sec 4 sec 5 Sec 6 sec sec Delay time from when documents are set until the ADF starts drawing them in Not used d 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 ech OO ON seh eh OO OH N ech 3 eh 3 eh OH eh OH 0 No correction of reference voltage during standby Periodical correction intervals of the 10sec reference voltage to be applied to 830 sec white level compensation for 1min document scanning during standby Not used SS 5 min 10 min 30 min T 0 CIS lock position 1 Location of Standby position of the CIS unit Not Home position the white level used reference film a Notuse S l NOTE WSW45 is applicable only to models equipped with a flat bed scanner e Selectors 1 through 3 Delay time from when documents are set until the ADF starts drawing them in Not used These selectors determine how long the ADF will delay automatic drawing in of documents to the scanning standby position after you set them in the ADF as well as determining whether or not the ADF autom
147. d to a mass storage device or scanner Remove all other devices and connect the port to the machine only Turn off the printer status monitor in the device options tab in the printer driver If the print port is set as an ECP port change it to a normal port Try resetting the factory settings Remedy Main PCB Is it possible to print with No Replace the main PCB failure another PC and printer cable Yes This problem may appear under the specified system environment Check the environment which the user used Although the USB driver is installed it is unable to find the BRUSB port Windows98 Me only User Check Re install according to the instruction of the subsection 3 2 in Chapter 2 Try to connect the machine directly to the computer if it is connected through a USB hub Computer 1 Windows 95 or Windows Yes Not supported Operating NT4 0 oystem Computer Does Universal Serial Bus No This problem can be caused settings Controllers appear in the by your computer settings Device Manager tab of System See the computer manual Properties in control panel 2 USB cable 3 Does Add New Hardware The USB cable is damaged machine Wizard appears on the screen Replace the cable If the damage same problem appears the machine will be damaged or Does test print complete 6 18 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL This machine does not appear in Chooser with iMac and Power Macintosh G3 with USB User Check
148. dels equipped with LAN interface e Selector 3 Internet FAX forward function If this selector is set to ON the machine may forward a FAX message received through Internet to other remote G3 facsimile equipment WSWA43 Function setting 21 Addition of a header station 1D to FAX images to be sent to PCs having e mail addresses Wait time for PCFax reception Class 2 and FPTS command transmission esa ON Automatic start of remote d m id JPEG coding Not used 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Selector 1 is applicable to those models equipped with LAN interface 2 3 4 Detection time of 2100 Hz CED or ANSam 5 NOTE e Selector 8 JPEG coding Not used Setting this selector to 0 disables the equipment from sending receiving JPEG color images and from receiving JPEG monochrome images A 43 APPENDIX 3 FIRMWARE SWITCHS WSW WSW44 Speeding up scanning 1 O s 1 5 No 6 0 Obtained compensation data ineffective S 1 min Effective time length of the white level 3 min compensation data obtained l 5 mi beforehand Not used d 10min 15min 20min 30 min NOTE WSW44 is applicable only to models equipped with a flat bed scanner e Selectors 6 through 8 Effective time length of the white level compensation data obtained beforehand Not used If you set documents in the ADF and the document front sensor detects them or if you open the document tray ASSY an
149. detected when the line is connected via the 5 external telephone except in the external TAD mode 6 7 2 Wel NOTE Selectors 6 and 7 take effect only in the V 34 mode e Selector 3 Dialing during document reading into the temporary memory in in memory message transmission If this selector is set to 0 the machine waits for document reading into the memory to complete and then starts dialing This enables the machine to list the total number of pages in the header of the facsimile message e Selectors 4 and 5 No of CNG cycles to be detected when the line is connected via the external telephone except in the external TAD mode The machine interprets a CNG as an effective signal if it detects a CNG signal by the number of cycles specified by these selectors when the line is connected via the external telephone except in the external TAD mode e Selectors 6 and 7 No of CNG cycles to be detected when the line is connected via the external telephone in the external TAD mode The machine interprets a CNG as an effective signal if it detects a CNG signal by the number of cycles specified by these selectors when the line is connected via the external telephone in the external TAD mode A 30 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL WSW 7 Function setting 5 o we le s wu 7 Detection of distinctive ringing i Not used NOTE e Selector 1 takes effect only in models versions having a TEL key e Selector 4 i
150. dial tone interrupt detecting 0 30 ms Z o R 0 Once O eh OO 0 00 No pause 3 5 sec WAIT 7 sec WAIT 10 5 sec WAIT 14 sec WAIT 2nd dial tone detection only in pulse dialing DP system 2nd dial tone detection both in DP and push button PB dialing system 1 Twice 1 50 ms APPENDIX 3 FIRMWARE SWITCHS WSW e Selectors 1 through 3 Pause button setting and 2nd dial tone detection oelectors l 2 3 0 0 0 No WAIT is inserted even if the Pause button is pressed 0 0 1 If you press the Pause button during dialing the machine will insert WAIT 0 1 0 as defined in the above table 0 1 1 If the Pause button is pressed repeatedly the machine inserts the 1 0 0 specified WAIT multiplied by the number of depressions It applies also in hook up dialing O 1 When these selectors are set to 1 0 1 1 1 0 If you press the Pause button during dialing the machine will wait for the 1 1 1 2nd dial tone to be sent via the communications line When these selectors are set to 1 1 0 or 1 1 1 If you press the Pause button during dialing the machine will first wait for the 2nd dial tone to be sent via the communications line After that the machine will insert a WAIT of 3 5 seconds If no 2nd dial tone is received within the specified time length set by WSW08 the machine will disconnect the line if in automatic dialing or it will start transmitting the dial signal if given after depression of the Pause but
151. e machine dirty Dirt in the drum Is the transfer roller dirty Replace the drum unit unit No Replace the high voltage power supply PCB NOTE This problem may disappear after printing approximately 5 pages of completely blank sheets Is the problem solved after replacing the drum unit How to clean the pressure roller Clean the pressure roller as follows 1 Set ten or more sheets of paper in the paper tray 2 Check the absence of paper in the ADF and the paper tray 3 Press Copy button to copy and repeat it five times 4 4 Check whether any stain are observed on the back of paper or not 6 36 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL Black and blurred vertical streaks User Check 1 Clean the corona wire in the drum unit Nv ea As uv 2 Check that the corona wire cleaner is at the home position 3 Check that the toner cartridge is not empty 4 5 The toner cartridge may be damaged Install a new toner cartridge The drum unit may be damaged Install a new drum unit Dirt on the 1 Is there any dirt on that Clean the scanner window scanner window Dirt on the white Is there any dirt on that Kd Clean the white tape tape Dirt on the CIS Is there any dirt on that Yes Replace the CIS Corona wire 4 Is the vertical block streak Ye Heturn the wire cleaner to its failure about 10mm wide home position Check if the wire cleaner is at its home position
152. e 01 initializes all of the EEPROM areas but entering 91 does not initialize some areas as listed below Function code 01 91 Data item Maintenance mode functions User switches These will be initialized Firmware switches Remote activation code These will not be initialized Station ID data All of these will be initialized Outside line number These will not be initialized Telephone function registration One touch dialing opeed dialing Group dialing NOTE If you replace the main PCB with one used for any other machine carry out this procedure and then customize the EEPROM maintenance mode function code 74 in Subsection 3 14 lt Operating Procedure gt 1 Press the 0 and 1 keys or the 9 and 1 keys according to your need in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode The PARAMETER INIT will appear on the LCD 2 Upon completion of parameter initialization the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode 3 Be sure to turn the machine power off If you press the 9 key twice to exit from the maintenance mode without turning the power off then the machine will not fully initialize the EEPROM 7 4 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 2 Printout of Scanning Compensation Data Maintenance mode 05 Function The equipment prints out the white and black level data for scanning compensation lt Operating Procedure gt Do not start this function merely after po
153. e installation is now complete For Windows XP Users Only Make sure that you followed the instructions in 1 to 16 on pages 2 18 to 2 19 17 When this screen appears connect the parallel interface cable to your PC and then connect it to the machine Plug the machine into the AC power outlet Turn the power switch on Caution Do not plug the power cord before connecting the parallel interface cable lt may cause damage to your machine The installation of the Brother drivers will automatically start The screen appears one after another please wait for a while 18 The README file will be displayed Please read this file for troubleshooting information and then close the file to continue installation 19 Check the Run On Line Registration and then click Next 20 When the following screen appears click Finish and wait as the PC restarts Windows and continues the installation 2 21 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND BASIC OPERATION OK A Basic Universal printer driver was installed with the MFL PRO Software Suite which is certified for use with Windows operating systems Brother also offers a fully featured printer driver Native driver that includes more features than the Basic Universal driver However this driver does not include a Windows certificate To install the Brother Native driver proceed to step 21 NOTE For details on what features are available see chapter 2 of the Software Us
154. e main PCB Engine PCB error Paper size setting error e Paper width sensor e Paper size Paper width sensor remains ON e Paper width sensor 82 Paper feeding error e Paper pick up roller Paper jam Regist sensor Regist sensor second regist sensor or Main PCB manual feed sensor remaining ON 8 W Paper jam Regist sensor actuator Paper eject sensor remaining ON If the paper width sensor is defective replace the needle tube amp head flat cable ASSY e Main PCB No paper tray loaded e Paper tray No 2nd paper tray loaded e Paper tray Paper jam e Regist sensor actuator Paper eject sensor remaining OFF even e f the paper width sensor is after regist sensor is turned OFF defective replace the needle tube amp head flat cable ASSY e Main PCB Main cover opened e Main PCB e Scanner unit Document too long to scan IN 85 87 00 00 Al 2 A A e Document front sensor Document not detected by the document Document rear sensor rear sensor e Document sensor PCB A3 e Document feed roller e ADF motor e Main PCB A4 Not used 50 or more of white level data is improper FS FAX transmission scan failure detected e CIS First attempt e Main PCB FAX transmission scan failure detected Second attempt Not used The document cover is not Remove the document and close the closed document cover A5 6 A BB gt 6 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING Error factor Check No
155. eady connected an interface cable Turn on your Macintosh Insert the supplied CD ROM for Macintosh into your CD ROM drive Double click the Start Here OSX folder to install the printer driver and Remote Setup program If the language screen appears select your language Click Install next to the MFL Pro Suite for your country oelect Network Interface and then click Install Connect the network interface cable to the printer and then connect it to a free port on your hub Plug the machine into the AC power outlet Turn the power switch on Select Applications from the Go menu Open the Print Center icon Click the Add Printer button Select AppleTalk Select BRN xxxxxx P1 and then click the Add button NOTE xxxxxx are the last six digits of the Ethernet adaress Network User s Guide Chapter 7 on the CD ROM Select Quit Printer Center from the Printer Center menu OK The setup is now complete NOTE For CD users of Mac OS 10 2 2 or greater Please see Network User s Guide Chapter 7 on the ROM for information about using Rendezvous 2 31 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL CHAPTER 3 THEORY OF OPERATION 1 ELECTRONICS 1 1 General Block Diagram Fig 3 1 shows a general block diagram Control Centronics panel parallel interface SIR Control Section data Line NCU Scanner unit Laser printing unit Paper Low and Hand set CIS unit feeding high voltage Scanner motor Charging exposing me
156. ed garbage correction 0 ON 1 OFF processing 5 Not used 8 NOTE e Selector 3 is applicable only to models equipped with a parallel interface e Selectors 6 through 8 are applicable only to models equipped with a flat bed scanner e Selectors 1 and 2 Monitoring the PC ON OFF state For the related functions refer to WSW36 selectors 2 and 3 e Selectors 3 Parallel port output pins kept at high level Setting this selector to 0 will keep all parallel output pins of the facsimile equipment at high level Use this setting if Resource Manager bundled with MFC models installed to Windows NT running on the connected PC fails to monitor the power ON OFF state of the facsimile equipment WSW47 Extending the closing state of the FAX line NNI Speed USB 1 1 Full Speed 1 USB 1 1 Full Speed is set 1 7 m owitching of USB 2 0 High 0 Auto Automatic switching A 46 WSW48 Function setting 23 Ka Tu Number of pieces of scan key information registered according to application i e Number of PCs that can be registered via Net Available Function PC registration using the Network TWAIN Size of the RAM Disk when using PCL PS Flag detection time when receiving a command Scanning light source WARMUP time Adjustment Models concerned CCD scanning type BHM 3838 Not used 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 1 Mbytes 2 Mbytes 4 Mbytes No adjustment
157. eiving print fax server Try sending an E mail message from the PC to a user at the remote site who can receive mail via the POP3 server If this does not work there may be an E mail configuration problem on the PC on the local E mail server or on the remote POP3 server Double check to make sure that the E mail parameters that you configured on the PC and on the remote print fax server match those that are configured on the E mail servers 2 If you can print small files OK but are having problems printing large files the problem may be in the e mail system Some e mail systems have difficulties printing large files If the file does not reach its destination intact then the problem is with the E mail system 3 You can also enable the partial e mail print facility on your client PC this will split the e mail up into fragments which should then not overwhelm your e mail server To do this select the property dialog of the Brother Internet Print Port Windows 95 98 Me 2000 XP IPP Troubleshooting Want to use a different Port number other than 631 If you are using Port 631 for IPP printing you may find that your firewall may not let the print data through If this is the case use a different port number port 80 or configure your Firewall to allow Port 631 data through To send a print job using IPP to a machine using Port 80 the standard HTTP port enter the following when configuring your Windows 2000 XP system http ip addre
158. electrostatic image to be printed 1 Cycle of drum OD a Surface potential V 870 400 150 Drum sleeve 0 Time O Primary charging 2 Laser beam exposure and developing a Unexposed area Non image area b Exposed area Image area 3 Transfer the image to paper Fig 3 32 3 21 CHAPTER 3 THEORY OF OPERATION 2 7 3 Developing Developing causes the toner to be attracted to the electrostatic image on the drum so as to transform it into a visible image The developer consists of a non magnetic toner The development roller is made of conductive rubber and the supply roller which is also made of conductive sponge rotate against each other The toner is charged and carried from the supply roller to the development roller The toner adheres to the development roller and is conveyed to the photosensitive drum at an even thickness controlled by the blade The toner is nipped between the development roller and the drum and developed onto the latent image on the drum The electrostatic field between the drum and the development roller which is DC biased from the high voltage power supply creates the electrostatic potential to attract toner particles from the development roller to the latent image area on the drum surface Development roller Corona wire Photosensitive drum Blade x PS Transfer roller Supply roller Fig 3 33 2 7 4 Transfer 1 Trans
159. emote control operation or at the start of ICM recording Setting two or more selectors to 1 produces addition of attenuation assigned to each selector A 8 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL WSWO03 PABX mode setting CNG detection when sharing a modular wall socket with a telephone Not used CNG detection when sharing a modular wall socket with a telephone Not used 2 4 PABX Private automatic branch exchange NOTE Selectors 2 through 4 6 and 8 are not applicable where no PABX is installed e Selectors 1 and 5 CNG detection when sharing a modular wall socket with a telephone These selectors determine whether or not the machine detects a CNG signal when a line is connected to a telephone sharing a modular wall socket with the machine Upon detection of CNG signals by the number of cycles specified by these selectors the machine interprets CNG as an effective signal and then starts FAX reception Selector No 1 No 5 Cycle O A O A 0 5 cycle 0 A 1 B 1 0 cycle 1 B 0 A 1 5 cycles 1 B 1 B 2 0 cycles WSW04 TRANSFER facility setting Selector A No Function Setting and Specifications 1 Not used 6 No 14 Break time length for flash function NOTE Selectors 5 through 8 are not applicable in those countries where no transfer facility is supported e Selectors 7 and 8 Break time length for flash function These selectors set the break time length This setting is effective
160. en click MS DOS Prompt to open an MS DOS window Type the drive letter where the update data and transfer utility are located In the above example type CA from the command line and press the Enter key Then type CD UPDATE and press the Enter key To start the transfer utility transmitting the update data to the flash ROM of the machine type the following ICEN filename b Where filename is an update data file e g 8220xxxx dat Then press the Enter key During downloading the machine beeps intermittently Upon completion of the downloading the machine beeps continuousN NOTE If the machine cannot return to the standby state after completion of downloading turn the power off and on On a PC running Windows 98 Me 2000 1 Install the printer driver for the parallel port to your PC Once installed no more printer driver is required for your PC Copy the update data onto the desired directory of the hard disk e g CAUPDATE Copy the transfer utility Filedg32 exe onto the desired directory of the hard disk Run Filedg32 exe The Filedrgs window will appear as shown below B x Acrobat Distiller Paper Port Paper Port Brother Brother Color HL 050 se HL 40000 Select filets to be sent to the printer Brother DSP 8020 on LFT1 Drag and drop the update data onto the icon of the model being used in the Filedrgs windows During downloading the machine bee
161. ening screen does not appear click Start and select Run Then enter the CD drive letter and type STAHT EXE for example D START EXE 2 Click the Initial Setup icon on the menu screen 3 You can view the Initial Setup instructions For Macintosh users 1 Turn on the Macintosh Insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 2 Double click the Start Here icon or Start Here OS X icon Follow the on screen instructions 3 Click the Initial Setup icon on the menu screen 4 You can view the Initial Setup instructions 2 5 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND BASIC OPERATION 3 1 1 Attaching the Supports NOTE Do not connect the interface cable Connecting the interface cable is done when installing the driver 1 Attach the ADF document support ADF document support fs Control panel cover Fig 2 3 3 Attach the ADF support ADF document output support Fig 2 4 4 Close the control panel cover 2 6 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 1 2 Installing the Handset 1 Connect the curled handset cord to the machine and the other end to the handset U S A Canada only 3 1 3 Installing the Drum Unit Assembly 1 Open the front cover by pressing the front cover release button 2 7 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND BASIC OPERATION 2 Unpack the drum unit assembly Remove the protective part Drum unit assembly Protective part Fig 2 7 3 Rock it from side to side several times to distr
162. ensor is defective Clean the toner sensor 3 If the wiper in the toner cartridge is broken replace the toner cartridge with a new one Yes Fixing unit 3 Is the thermistor fitted No Fit the thermistor correctly thermistor failure correctly Yes Low voltage 4 Is the problem solved by Replace the low voltage power power supply replacing the low voltage supply PCB PCB failure power supply PCB 6 40 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL I 13 Image distortion Laser unit Is the laser unit secured to the installation frame incorrectly Check if there is any play Laser scanner Is the laser diode or the Yes Replace the laser unit LD emission scanner motor defective failure Scanner motor rotation failure Secure the unit correctly and tighten the screws Scanner Is the scanner harness Connect the harness correctly connection connected properly failure Check if it is coming loose Machine 1 Is the machine placed No Place the machine on a flat installation horizontally surface Toner cartridge 2 Does the problem happen Yes Remove and carefully shake the failure immediately after replacing the toner cartridge horizontally toner cartridge with a new one Scanner window 3 Is the scanner window dirty Yes Clean the scanner window with a dirty soft dry cloth Laser unit failure 4 Is the problem solved by Yes Replace the laser unit replacing the laser unit 6 41 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 15 White spots
163. ent of Installation Site Temperature Humidity Paper Paper Input Paper Output 50 to 90 5 F 10 to 32 5 C 20 to 80 without condensation lt Paper Tray gt e Paper type Plain paper Transparency e Paper size A4 Letter JIS B5 A5 ISO B5 A6 LGL ISO B6 EXE Weight 16 to 28lb 60 to 105g m e Maximum number of paper to be loaded Approx 250 sheets of 20lb 80g m Manual Feed Tray e Paper size Width 20lb 2 75 to 8 66 69 8 to 220 0mm Height 4 60 to 14 02 116 0 to 406mm Weight 16 to 43lb 60 to 161g m e Maximum number of paper to be loaded on the manual feed tray 1 sheet Maximum number of sheets to be output to the delivery tray In the case of face down delivery up to 150 sheets of plain paper 80g m In the case of face up delivery up to 1 sheet of plain paper BOg m 1 2 Copy Color Monochrome Copy Speed Multiple Copies Enlarge Reduce Resolution Fax Compatibility Coding System Modem Speed Original Size Scanning Width Printing Width Gray Scale Polling Types Contrast Control Resolution One Touch Dial Speed Dial Automatic Redial Auto Answer Memory Transmission Out of Paper Reception MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL Monochrome Up to 21cpm Letter size U S A Canada Version only Up to 20cpm A4 size Europe Version only Up to 99 pages 25 to 400 in increments of 1 600dpi Super G3 MH MR MMR JBIG 33600bps ADF Width 5 8 to 8 5 148mm
164. er s Guide Brother Native driver Installation 21 Click Start and select Printers and Faxes Click on Add a printer and the Add Printer Wizard will start When this screen appears click Next 22 Un check the Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer selection and then click Next 23 Select BMFC Brother MFL Port from the pull down window for the Printer Port Selection and then click Next 24 Click on Have Disk 25 Browse the CD ROM and highlight your language folder and click Open Highlight the WXP folder and click Open Highlight the Addprt folder and click Open 26 Click Open 27 Make sure X ENGW2K Addprt is displayed in the window and click OK XA is the drive letter of your CD ROM 28 Highlight the model you are installing from the list of machines and click Next NOTE Make sure you select a USB printer 29 The model you are installing will be listed in the window Select Yes or No if you want this driver to be your default printer and then click Next If this screen appears select Do not share this printer and Next Select Yes and Next to print a test page When this screen appears click Finish When this screen appears click Continue Anyway NOTE e There will be two Brother printer drivers listed in the Printers selection e The driver with Printer after the model name ex Brother MFC 8220 Printer is the Brother Native Driver OK The Brother Native Drivers have
165. ers Only The Brother PC FAX Printer and Scanner drivers have been installed and the installation is now complete 2 26 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 28 After the computer restarts click Yes to have the Control Center load each time Windows is started The Control Center will appear as an icon in the task tray If you click No the Scan key on the machine will be disabled NOTE Even if you select NO you will be able to launch the Brother Control Center later to use the Scan key by double clicking the Smart Ul icon on the desktop This loads the Brother Control Center to the task tray See AutoLoad the Brother Control Center Chapter 4 in the Documentation Software User s Guide located on the CD ROM OK For Windows 98 98SE Me 2000 Users The Brother PC FAX Printer and Scanner drivers have been installed and the installation is now complete For Windows 95 NT Users The Brother PC FAX and Printer drivers have been installed and the installation is now complete 2 2 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND BASIC OPERATION 3 2 5 For USB Interface Cable Users For Mac OS 8 6 to 9 2 Users 1 Switch off and unplug the machine from the AC outlet and disconnect it from your Macintosh if you already connected an interface cable 2 Turn on your Macintosh 3 Insert the supplied CD ROM for Macintosh into your CD ROM drive Double click the Start Here icon to install the printer scanner and PC FAX Send drivers If the lang
166. evices Recommended and then click Next NOTE If you see the following screen click OK 19 If the machine is un configured for your network Select the APIPA or un configured device from the list and then click Next Go to 20 If the machine is configured for your network Select the machine from the list and then click Next Go to 23 20 Click Configure IP Address 21 Enter the proper IP Address information for your network and then click OK e g Enter 192 168 0 105 for IP Address 22 Click Next NOTE See the For Administrator section of this guide or the NC 9100h User s Guide located on the CD ROM for more network configuration information Windows 98 98SE Me 2000 XP Users Go to 23 Windows 95 NT Users Go to 26 23 Select yes and then click Next 24 Click Next or enter the name you want displayed on the LCD for your PC and then click Next The default name is the name of your PC NOTE You can avoid receiving unwanted documents by setting a 4 digit PIN Number Please wait for the window to open 25 The README file will be displayed Please read this file for troubleshooting information and then close the file to continue installation 26 Check the Run On Line Registration and then click Next 27 Click Finish restart your computer Windows 95 98 98SE Me NT 2000 Users follow step 27 NOTE The Network Scanning feature is not supported in Windows 95 or NT OK For Windows XP Us
167. ews and then remove the FU front paper guide from the fixing unit Hint Regarding the proper mounting orientation of the FU front paper guide please refer to Fig 4 62 Be sure not to mount it upside down Fixing unit Taptite cup B M3x10 FU front paper guide 4 35 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 4 Remove the three cup B M3x10 Taptite screws and then remove the star wheel holder Fixing unit Q Taptite cup B M3x10 Star wheel holder Fig 4 64 5 Remove the cup B M3x12 Taptite screw 6 Release the thermistor ASSY harness from the four hooks 7 Remove the thermistor ASSY Fixing unit Taptite cup B M3x12 Thermistor relay PCB ASSY Thermistor ASSY harness Thermistor relay PCB ASSY Fig 4 65 4 36 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL NOTE When re assembling the thermistor to the FU frame upper ensure the direction of the thermistor is correct referring to the figure below FU frame upper Thermistor Thermistor Taptite cup B M3x12 Fig 4 66 8 Remove the two cup B M3x20 Taptite screws from the FU frame upper 9 Release the hooks and then remove the FU frame upper from the FU frame lower e H Hook FU frame lower nz Hook n Ca O Taptite cup B M3x20 FU frame upper Hook Taptite cup B M3x20 Si Fig 4 67 4 37 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 10 Remove the two pan S P washer M26x8 Taptite screws 11 Remove the
168. f main PCB Yes Replace the main PCB with solves the problem a normal part L 3 Printing from Macintosh applications fails User Check 1 Verify that the printer driver supplied with the printer has been installed in the system folder and selected in the selector Harness wire is damaged Replace the harness with a normal part Fix the connection properly Replace the FPC key with a normal part N Y C1 N W O 2 Check the port selected in the selector The selected port has to match the actual port to which the printer cable is connected Fault in machine Test page can be printed Check the symptom of the using the method described in problem and refer to an 3 4 Test Pattern 1 in Chapter appropriate section in this 7 Chapter to solve the problem Breakage of 2 Printing can be made using No Replace the main PCB main PCB an appropriate PC printer cable and RS 100M 6 25 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 TROUBLESHOOTING OF TELEPHONE FAX FUNCTIONS F 1 FAX transmission cannot be made T elephone call cannot be placed v User Check 1 Verify that the telephone cord is securely inserted Step Result Dialing mode Dialing signal PB or DP Yes Check the dialing mode setting comes out normally in each setting at customer s again mode Check the telephone line Use telephone line emulator cord between machine and socket Fix the connection properly Main PCB and NCU PCB are properly conne
169. fer process After the drum has been charged and exposed and has received a developed image the toner formed is transferred onto the paper by applying a negative charge to the back of the paper The negative charge applied to the paper causes the positively charged toner to leave the drum and adhere to the paper As a result the image is visible on the paper 2 Cleaning process of transfer roller If the toner is not transferred onto the paper perfectly it is possible that there may be residual toner on the drum which will adhere to the transfer roller The transfer voltage changes to a positive voltage during non printing rotation of the drum Therefore the transfer roller is cleaned by returning the positively charged toner adhering to the transfer roller onto the photo conductive drum 3 22 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 2 7 5 Fixing stage The image transferred to the paper by static electricity is fixed by heat and pressure when passing through the heat roller and the pressure roller in the fixing unit The thermistor keeps the surface temperature of the heat roller constant by detecting the surface temperature of the heat roller and turning on or off the halogen heater lamp 7 Thermistor 2 O SA LLLLL x 2 Ss T I e N OSOS NE SS ON BA N lt gt WS First eject roller NOS Heat roller CR N Ms ZZ 4 PN ASS MSY Pressure roller Fig 3 34 3 23 MFC
170. free solder s characteristics of being difficult to melt wet and spread as well as being hard a soldering iron needs to be applied for a longer period of time than when soldering with conventional tin lead solder While soldering is being performed it must be confirmed that the lead free solder is spreading When solder needs to be added when repairing PCBs the solder must only be added after sufficiently melting the previously soldered area When poor soldering is repaired the solder of the poorly soldered area must be sufficiently removed and lead free solder newly supplied Before starting soldering operations it must be determined whether or not the PCB has an LF indication If the PCB has an LF indication lead free solder corresponding to the digit following LF must be used Conventional solder including lead tin lead solder must not be used on a PCB that has an LF indication Use of tin lead solder on a PCB having an LF indication is prohibited A soldering iron for exclusive use with lead free solder must only be used a soldering iron used for soldering with tin lead solder must not be used with lead free solder The use of soldering irons designed for lead free solder is desirable see 7 Soldering iron below The requirement for the temperature of the soldering iron s tip is the same as that for soldering using conventional solder the temperature of the soldering iron s tip must not be raised even though the melting p
171. g maintenance work N WARNING 1 Always turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord from the power outlet before accessing any parts inside the machine 2 Some parts inside the machine are extremely hot immediately after the machine is used When opening the front cover or rear cover to access any parts inside the machine never touch the shaded parts shown in the following figures 6 2 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 1 3 Identify the Problem If you encounter any machine error or problem first identify it referring to the chart below then see the appropriate section NOTE The following troubleshooting sections contain both the actions which users should take or check and the ones which service technicians should perform The machine does not print The machine does not work not load paper EE reception of fax 7 Troubleshooting of Telephone Fax Functions Paper jam occurs 3 2 Original Jams Paper jam occurs cess aies 6 Troubleshooting of the Control Panel 3 3 Paper Jams E machine does 4 Software Setting Problems Other defect 5 Malfunctions not start E 10 10 Network Problem Problem Printed page has a problem 8 Image Defects 3 4 Paper Feeding Problems Printout is not EM 9 Incorrect Printout can not be done Printed image has a problem 6 3 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 ERROR MESSAGE 2 1 Error Message on the LCD If a machine error occurs the machine emits an
172. ge 30 minutes except the periodical maintenance parts the Paper Feeding Kit and the machine control boards whose MTTR is average 10 minutes 9 23 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 Initial Check 1 Operating environment Check if e The source voltage stays within 10 from the rated voltage shown on the rating plate e The machine is installed on a solid level surface e The room temperature is maintained between 10 C and 32 5 C The relative humidity is maintained between 20 and 80 e The machine is not located in a dusty place e The machine is not exposed to ammonia fumes or other harmful gases e The machine is not located in a hot or humid area such as near water or a humidifier e The machine is not exposed to direct sunlight e The room is well ventilated e The machine is not placed where the ventilation hole of the machine is blocked Print paper Check if e A recommended type of print paper is being used If the paper is too thick or too thin or tends to curl paper jams or paper feed problems may occur or printed images may be blurred e The print paper is damp If so use fresh paper and check whether the print quality improves or not e he print paper is short grained paper or acid paper If so print quality problems may occur For further information on paper refer to subsection 2 3 Paper in CHAPTER 1 Consumable parts Check if e he L
173. gt 1 Inthe initial stage of the maintenance mode press the 5 key twice and SCANNER AREA SET is displayed on the LCD display 2 Store the magnification correction setting value in the EEPROM and the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode 7 20 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 13 Paper Feed and Paper Eject Test Maintenance mode 67 lt Function gt This function is to verify if paper is properly fed from a paper tray and properly ejected to a paper eject tray Please make use of it for confirmation after repair service is done lt Operating Procedure gt 1 2 Press the 6 and 7 keys in this order and SELECT TRAY 1 is displayed on the LCD Press the up arrow key or the down arrow key and the display is changed to SELECT TRAY2 Select the tray to be checked using the up arrow key or the down arrow key Press the SET button and PAPER FEED TEST is displayed on the LCD then paper feed and paper eject test starts Grids as shown in the next page are printed on paper Press the Stop Exit button and the paper feed and paper eject test is cancelled then the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode Hint e The paper feed and paper eject test continues until paper loaded in the tray runs out unless the STOP Exit button is pressed e When paper in the tray runs out Check Paper and Reload Paper are displayed When paper is loaded in the tray the machine returns
174. hange in their appearance The periodical replacement parts listed below should be replaced at the service center referring to the service life For the procedures to replace these parts refer to CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBLY Fixing Unit 115V LM2579001 80 000 pages LEM 3 14 in See subsection 3 14 in Fixing Unit 220V LM2578001 1 Paper Feeding Kit Pad holder Paper pick LJ7920001 1 50 000 pages up roller ASSY See subsection 3 3 and 3 21 in CHAPTER 4 NOTE e The above table shows only estimated values They are subject to change without prior notice e The actual number of printed pages may vary depending on your average type of print job and paper These figures are based on 5 coverage per page e The part numbers listed above are as of February 2004 They are subject to change without notice 5 7 CHAPTER 5 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2 1 Fixing Unit lt Disassembly Procedure gt 1 Disconnect the power cord from the machine e Machine Power cord Fig 5 13 2 Close the front cover ASSY and pull out the paper tray Front cover ASSY Paper Tray Fig 5 14 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL Remove the bind B M4x12 Taptite screw and then remove the rear cover C 3 O il D gt Q O o O x Fig 5 15 Taptite bind B M4x12 Remove the outer chute 4 Hook eb 2 C O _ eb 2 O Fig 5 16 9 9 CHAPTER 5 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 5 Remove t
175. he 1 and 3 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode The 00 will appear on the LCD 2 Press the keys and buttons in the order designated in the illustration shown below The LCD shows the corresponding number in decimal notation each time a key or button is pressed Check that the displayed number is correct by referring to the illustration below If a key or button is pressed out of order the machine beeps and displays the INVALID OPERATE on the LCD To return to the status ready to accept key amp button entry for operational check press the Stop Exit button 3 After the last number key or button is pressed the machine beeps for one second and returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode To terminate this operation press the Stop Exit button The machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode MFC 8220 9 SSR MFC 8220 Ges 38 4 Clear Back Menu fax coP Copy Scan Enlarge ook Reduce Contrast Resolution KO HOP MOS HOS ES oen za ur d Y FO GM OTO cuatty Options A Stop Exit ABC DAA OCOD D 2 Fig 7 6 7 13 CHAPTER 7 MAINTENANCE MODE 3 8 Receiver Volume Adjustment Maintenance mode 16 This is only for display not for adjustment lt Function gt When the handset volume is set to HIGH it is affected by various characteristics of the FET field effect transistor on the main PCB so the fine adjustments describe
176. he Brother drivers will automatically start Follow the instructions on the screen 23 Click Yes to have the Brother MFL Pro Control Center load each time Windows is started The Control Center will appear as an icon in the task tray If you click No the Scan key on the machine will be disabled NOTE Even if you select NO you will be able to launch the Brother Control Center later to use the Scan key by double clicking the Smart Ul icon on the desktop This loads the Brother Control Center to the task tray See AutoLoad the Brother Control Center Chapter 4 in the Documentation Software User s Guide located on the CD ROM OK The Brother PC FAX Printer and Scanner drivers have been installed and the installation is now complete CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND BASIC OPERATION lt For Windows 2000 Professional Users Only gt Make sure that you followed the instructions in 1 to 16 on pages 2 18 to 2 19 17 When this screen appears connect the parallel interface cable to your PC and then connect it to the machine Plug the machine into the AC power outlet Turn the power switch on Caution Do not plug the power cord before connecting the parallel interface cable lt may cause damage to your machine 18 Click the Next 19 The README file will be displayed Please read this file for troubleshooting information and then close the file to continue installation 20 Check the Run On Line Registration
177. he PS Brother PostScript driver select Custom and then follow the on screen instructions When the Select Components screen appears check PS Printer Driver and then continue following the on screen instructions 18 The README file will be displayed Please read this file for troubleshooting information and then close the file to continue installation 19 Check the Run On Line Registration and then click Next 20 Click Finish to restart your computer 21 After the computer restarts click Yes to have the Control Center load each time Windows is started The Control Center will appear as an icon in the task tray If you click No the Scan key on the machine will be disabled NOTE Even if you select NO you will be able to launch the Brother Control Center later to use the Scan key by double clicking the Smart Ul icon on the desktop This loads the Brother Control Center to the task tray See AutoLoad the Brother Control Center Chapter 4 in the Documentation Software User s Guide located on the CD ROM OK The Brother PC FAX Printer and Scanner drivers have been installed and the installation is now complete 2 24 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 2 4 For Optional NC 9100h Network Interface Users For Windows 95 98 98SE Me NT 2000 Professional XP Make sure that the NC 9100h Network Print Fax Server is installed into the MFC See Optional accessories in Chapter 13 of the User s Guide Connect the ne
178. he rush current The duty cycle is 10 ms ON and 20 ms OFF However the duty cycle control may emit switching noise to the AC line Depending upon the codes and regulations in the country this selector should be set to O e Selector 5 Drum cleaning prompt settings Setting this selector to 1 OFF deactivates all of the drum cleaning prompt settings enabled by selectors 5 to 7 of WSWA42 A 33 APPENDIX 3 FIRMWARE SWITCHS WSW WSW31 Function setting 9 1 Not used Default reduction rate for failure of automatic reduction during 0 ON 1 recording 3 4 Minimum short OFF duration in CHANGE DRUM SOON message e Selector 2 Default reduction rate for failure of automatic reduction during recording This selector sets the default reduction rate to be applied if the automatic reduction function fails to record one page data sent from the calling station in a single page of the current recording paper If it is set to 0 the machine records one page data at full size 100 without reduction if it is set to 1 the machine records it at the size specified according to the current paper size e Selector 5 Minimum short OFF duration in distinctive ringing The ringer pattern consists of short and long rings e g short short long rings This selector sets the minimum OFF duration following a short ring in order to avoid missing ringer tones in distinctive ringing If this selector is set to 1 when the short
179. he sensor clip 23 23 Remove the document cover sensor from the frame L Document cover sensor Frame L N Connector i Es F PR IU Document cover sensor Taptite bind B M3x10 Le Sensor clip f Fig 4 112 Sensor clip Toner LED PCB unit ASSY NE 4 61 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 3 23 Thermistor ASSY 1 Remove the thermistor ASSY gt op 09 lt S HI C E Fig 4 113 3 24 Fan Motor 60 Unit LV Fan Motor 60 Unit 1 Remove the fan motor 60 unit LV and the fan motor 60 unit Main frame R unit c 2 O co UN O O c U LL Fan motor 60 unit LV Fig 4 114 4 62 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 25 Frame R 1 Remove the four bind B M4x12 Taptite screws 2 Remove the cup S M3x16 Taptite screw 3 Remove the two cup S M3x6 Taptite screws 4 Remove the main frame R unit Main frame R unit TR D 2 Ww Taptite bind B M4x12 n Under bar Taptite cup S M3x6 Taptite bind B M4x12 Taptite cup S M3x16 N K Taptite bind Under bar i B M4x12 Taptite cup S M3x6 Fig 4 115 4 63 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 5 Remove the two bind B M4x12 Taptite screws 6 Remove the cup S M3x6 Taptite screw 7 Remove the drum spring R 8 Remove the FG plate Taptite cup S M3x6 FG plate KS Taptite bind B M4x12 Drum spring R b i A Taptite bind B M4x12 Fig 4
180. he two bind B M4x12 Taptite screws and then remove the rear cover L 6 Remove the two bind B M4x12 Taptite screws and then remove the rear cover R Taptite bind B M4x12 Rear cover R Taptite bind B M4x12 Taptite bind B M4x12 Rear cover L Fig 5 17 7 Remove the two cup S M3x6 Taptite screws and then remove the NCU unit MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 8 Disconnect the heater harness and thermistor harness 9 Remove the bind B M4x12 Taptite screw and the shoulder screw and then remove the fixing unit Fixing unit Heater harness Taptite bind B M4x12 Thermistor harness Fig 5 19 5 11 CHAPTER 5 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE lt Assembly Procedure gt 1 Mount the fixing unit using the bind B M4x12 Taptite screw and the shoulder screw 2 Insert the heater harness and the thermistor harness Fixing unit Shoulder screw Heater harness CA Sec So Gel Y NEN P Taptite bind B M4x12 RE O Thermistor harness Fig 5 20 3 Mount the NCU unit using the two cup S M3x6 Taptite screws 5 12 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Mount the rear cover L using the two bind B M4x12 Taptite screws 5 Mount the rear cover R using the two bind B M4x12 Taptite screws Taptite bind B M4x12 Rear cover R Taptite bind B M4x12 Taptite bind B M4x12 Rear cover L Fig 5 22 6 Mount the outer chute Hook Outer chute Fig 5 23 9 13 CHAPTER 5 PERIODIC MAIN
181. heat roller 25 12 Remove the halogen lamp Screw pan Heat roller 25 S P washer M26x8 9 Washer plain 26 los 11 y Halogen lamp Screw pan S P washer M26x8 Washer plain 26 7 Colored side r Sa 115V Orange 1 e J 220V Black UM Halogen lamp FU frame upper connector plate Heat roller 25 Halogen lamp Fig 4 68 NOTE When re assembling the halogen lamp ensure that the direction of the halogen lamp is correct referring to the figure above caurion e Never touch the surface of the halogen lamp e When securing the screw to assemble the halogen lamp connector plate ensure you use the Fu lamp assembly jig ASSY as shown in the figure below to avoid damaging the edge of the halogen lamp Screw pan S P washer M26x8 Halogen lamp connector plate oO Washer plain 26 Fu lamp assembly jig ASSY Halogen lamp 4 38 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL Remove the HR bearing 25 Remove the HR gear 34 13 14 15 Remove the HR retaining ring 25 16 Remove the heat roller washer 25 17 Remove the HR bearing 25 HR bearing 25 Y HR bearing 25 Heat roller 25 Heat roller washer 25 ns HR gear 34 Fig 4 70 caution Never touch the surface of the heat roller NOTE e When re assembling the heat roller 25 to the FU frame upper place the two projections onto the bosses on the frame as shown in the figure below HR gear 34 HR
182. hine starts dialing The transferred data does not include the transmission terminal ID Instead a cover page and an end page as shown on the next page are automatically attached 7 17 CHAPTER 7 MAINTENANCE MODE Example of the cover page FAX TRANSFER COVER PAGE JOB NO TOTAL PAGE S NAME FAX TEL TIME 8X5 653 B0108251119 U0203 122124 VER B BROE1J424039 Example of the end page 001 001 BROTHER 052 824 2330 052 824 2846 2002 03 04 14 11 Fig 7 11 FAX TRANSFER END PAGE JOB NO TOTAL PAGE S NAME FAX TEL MACHINE STATUS 1 Al MACHINE STATUS 2 A3 MACHINE STATUS 3 AA MACHINE STATUS 4 Al MACHINE STATUS 5 84 MACHINE STATUS 6 Al MACHINE STATUS 7 00 MACHINE STATUS 8 00 MACHINE STATUS 9 00 001 001 BROTHER 052 824 2330 052 824 2846 Fig 7 12 7 18 Job No of the transfer setting Total number of pages to be transferred Sender s name registered in the sender s FAX machine Sender s FAX number Sender s phone number Start time Model code Boot ROM information ROM information Serial number Job No of the transfer setting Total number of pages to be transferred Sender s name registered in the sender s FAX machine Sender s FAX number Sender s phone number Error code Error code Error code Error code Error code Error code Error code Error code Error code MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 11 Fine Adjustment of Scan Start End Positions Maintenance
183. his selector sets the time length for the T1 timer e Selectors 7 and 8 Elapsed time for time out control If the machine receives no response no G3 command from the called terminal in automatic sending during the time set by these selectors it disconnects the line A 15 APPENDIX 3 FIRMWARE SWITCHS WSW WSW10 Protocol definition 2 A Time length from transmission of the last dial digit to CML ON EIn Es Time length from CML ON to CNG EI T transmission Time length from CML ON to CED transmission except for facsimile to telephone switching 1 time No of training retries 2times 3 times 4 times Encoding system MR 0 Allowed Not allowed 8 Compression 0 Allowed Not allowed e Selector2 Time length from transmission of the last dial digit to CML ON This selector sets the time length from when the machine transmits the last dial digit until the CML relay comes on e Selector3 Time length from CML ON to CNG transmission This selector sets the time length until the machine transmits a CNG after it turns on the CML relay e Selector 4 Time length from CML ON to CED transmission This selector sets the time length until the machine transmits a CED after it turns on the CML relay This setting does not apply to switching between facsimile and telephone e Selectors 5 and 6 No of training retries These selectors set the number of training retries to be repeated before automatic fallback e Selec
184. iately before you need to install it into the machine If an unpacked drum unit is subjected to excessive direct sunlight or room light the unit may be damaged Handle the drum unit and toner cartridge carefully If toner scatters on your hands or clothes wipe or wash it off with cold water immediately Discard the used drum unit according to local regulations keeping it separate from domestic waste If you have questions call your local waste disposal office Be sure to seal up the drum unit tightly so that toner powder does not spill out of the unit Do not reset the drum counter when replacing the toner cartridge only Do not turn off the drum lamp until the drum counter is reset It is recommended to clean the machine when you replace the drum unit Refer to subsection 3 PERIODICAL CLEANING in this Chapter 5 3 CHAPTER 5 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 1 2 Toner Cartridge Life expectancy 6 500 pages high yield toner cartridge 3 300 pages standard cartridge When printing A4 size paper at 5 print coverage NOTE e The life of a new toner cartridge varies according to a print coverage ratio and a print job In the case of single sided printing of typical business documents at 5 print coverage on A4 size paper up to 3 300 pages standard cartridge or 6 500 pages high yield toner cartridge can be printed e The amount of toner used varies according to what is printed on the page and the print density setting
185. ibute the toner evenly inside the assembly Fig 2 8 4 Push the drum unit assembly into the machine until it snaps into place Fig 2 10 2 8 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 1 4 Load Paper in the Paper Tray 1 Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine Fig 2 11 2 While pressing the paper guide release lever slide the adjusters to fit the paper size Check that the guides are firmly in the slots on the tray NOTE For Legal size paper press the universal guide release button and pull out the rear of the paper tray Universal guide release button 2 9 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND BASIC OPERATION 3 Fan the stack of paper well to avoid paper jams and misfeeds F N Fig 2 14 4 Put paper in the paper tray Check that the paper is flat in the tray and below the maximum paper mark 5 Put the paper tray firmly back in the machine and unfold the support flap before you use the machine Support flap Fig 2 16 NOTE For details on supported paper specifications see About paper in Chapter 2 of the User s Guide MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 1 5 Installing the Power Cord and Phone Line NOTE Do not connect the Parallel or USB cable yet 1 Make sure that the power switch is off Connect the power cord to the machine SN Fig 2 17 2 Plug the power cord into an AC outlet Turn the power switch on T e O LO o e Power cord Fig
186. in 8 Press the Stop Exit button and the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode 7 14 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 9 Sensor Operational Check Maintenance mode 32 lt Function gt This function allows you to check whether the 14 sensors document front sensor document rear sensor cover sensor hook sensor toner sensor regist front sensor regist rear sensor cassette sensor tray 1 paper sensor tray 2 paper sensor 2nd cassette sensor 2nd regist sensor fixing sensor and paper eject sensor operate correctly These sensors are provided for models supporting a 2nd paper tray lt Operating Procedure gt 1 Press the 3 and 2 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode The machine beeps 1100 Hz and 400 Hz tones cyclically through the following volumes for testing the speaker To stop beeping press the Menu button 400 Hz Low Medium High OFF OFF 1100 Hz High Medium lt Low Fig 7 10 If the sensing status are as listed below the LCD will show the following DFDRCVHk and TNMNRSCSP1P2C2R2 PU PO which can be switched by pressing the Start button for machines Given below is the relationship between the LCD indication sensor names and sensor status LCD Sensors Sensing status DF Document front sensor No document detected DR Document rear sensor No document detected CV Cover sensor Front cover closed HK Hook sensor Off hook
187. in Chapter 7 Section 3 9 that is press the 3 and 2 keys in the maintenance mode Heater warming up timeout error e Thermistor ASSY Heater does not reach 60 C within 11 sec e Halogen lamp Heater warming up timeout error Thermistor ASSY Heater does not reach 100 C within 15 Halogen lamp Heater temperature exceeds the maximum Thermistor ASSY high temperature Power supply PCB 270 C or more is detected for 1 sec Heater temperature lowers the minimum low Thermistor ASSY temperature Power supply PCB 60 C or less is detected for 1 sec Heater temperature does not go up enough Halogen lamp Slower temperature rise rate than 2 C 5 Power supply PCB sec is detected Heater hard limiter operates e Thermistor ASSY 6F e Power supply PCB 71 Scanner motor does not synchronize with e Scanner motor the reference clock Cannot detect Beam Detect signal Drum unit is not mounted e Toner sensor e Drum unit Toner empty e Toner sensor e Toner cartridge In casing temperature error e Thermistor ASSY Heater harness disconnected or broken e Thermistor ASSY e Halogen lamp Power was turned off when error 76 or error 78 occurred Heater thermistor harness disconnected or e Thermistor ASSY broken 6 6 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 79 In casing temperature sensor harness Thermistor ASSY disconnected or broken Main PCB 7A Main motor does not synchronize with the Engine PCB reference clock Main motor ASIC error on th
188. intenance mode restoring it to the standby state e Pressing the Stop Exit button after entering only one digit restores the machine to the initial stage of the maintenance mode e Ifan invalid function code is entered the machine resumes the initial stage of the maintenance mode 7 1 CHAPTER 7 MAINTENANCE MODE 2 LIST OF MAINTENANCE MODE FUNCTIONS Maintenance mode Functions Function Reference Function Subsection Code EEPROM Parameter Initialization 3 1 7 4 LL pm Il 05 Printout of Scanning Compensation Data 3 2 7 5 AAAA0UU lJ P p F CECR Tesipanemi S409 3 4 7 8 5 1 7 9 Printout of Firmware Switch Data 6 7 12 3 7 7 13 3 8 7 14 Operational Check of LCD 3 6 7 12 Operational Check of Control Panel PCB O 9 MMM ASS 3 9 7 15 312729 Bithomthe Maintenance Mode No applicable to the Japanese version ADF Automatic document feeder 7 2 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL lt IMPORTANT gt Basically the maintenance mode functions listed on the previous page should be accessed by service personnel only However you may allow end users to access some of these under the guidance of service personnel e g by telephone The user accessible functions codes 10 11 12 54 80 82 87 and 91 are shaded in the table given on the previous page Function code 10 accesses the firmware switches WSW each of which has eight selectors You should not allow end users to a
189. ion RAM RAM Hard Disk Space Windows 95 98 98SE 488 66 MHz 16MB 40MB Operating NT System Workstation Pentium 75MHz 16MB 32MB 50MB 4 0 2000 Pentium 133MHz 64MB 128MB 50MB Pentium 150MHz 32MB 64MB 50MB OO XP Pentium 300MHz eas 50MB Apple OS 8 6 to 9 2 OS 8 6 to 9 2 6 to 9 2 All base models 32MB 64MB Macintosh meet minimum 50MB Operating OS X 10 1 to system 128MB 160MB System 10 2 1 requirements 2 2 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 2 UNPACKING When unpacking the machine check to see that all of the following components are included in the carton CD ROMs For Windows 9 For Macintosh 1 Control Panel 6 Paper Tray 2 Telephone Handset 7 ADF Document Support 3 ADF Document Output Support 8 Control Panel Cover 4 Face down Output Tray Support 9 Face down Output Tray Flap with Extension Support Flap 10 Front Cover 5 Manual Feed Tray 11 Power Switch ADF Document Support Drum Unit Assembly Power Cord including Toner Cartridge ADF Document Output Support Telephone Handset Handset Curled Cord U S A Canada only U S A Canada only Accessory Order Form Telephone Line Cord Test Sheet U S A only U S A Canada only Fig 2 1 Carton components may differ from one country to another Save all packing materials and the carton NOTE e The interface cable is not a standard accessory Please purchase the appropriate interface cable for the interface you
190. ion in the print quality Fig 5 1 caution While removing the drum unit handle it carefully because it may contain toner lt How to Check the Remaining Drum Life gt Press the Menu 2 0 and 3 keys in this order and the drum life is displayed on the LCD for 2 seconds Drum Life Remaining xx Fig 5 2 lt Replacement Procedure gt 1 Press the front cover release button and then open the front cover of the machine 2 Pull out the drum unit caution e We recommend that you place the drum unit on a piece of disposable paper or cloth in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity do not touch the electrodes shown in the figure below 5 2 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 While pressing the blue lock lever take the toner cartridge out of the drum unit E Unpack the new drum unit G Put the toner cartridge in the new drum unit until you hear it lock into place with a click When the toner cartridge is installed correctly the blue lock lever is lifted automatically Make sure you fit the toner cartridge properly or it may separate from the drum unit when you pick up the drum unit Fig 5 5 6 Put the drum unit in the machine 7 Press the Clear Back button 8 Press the 1 key to reset the drum counter When Accepted message is displayed on the LCD close the front cover caution e Only unpack a drum unit immed
191. is not compatible with the MIME format you cannot transmit a document to the receiver Depending on the receiver s server there are some cases that the error mail will not be sent back 4 Message cannot be received in an HTML format This format is not supported All message must be received in a TIFF F Format 5 If the size of a documents image data is huge there is a possibility of unsuccessful transmission if the system administrator has imposed a limit on the maximum size of e mail and their attachments The document you are sending should be separated into smaller documents that will be accepted by the mail server Ex A 42 page document of the CCITT 1 test chart is approximately 1Mbyte in size 6 If you do not receive e mail check the Auto Polling setting and Polling frequency 7 If you cannot retrieve mail from the mail server check the setting for the POP3 server and Mailbox name Check that the POP3 password is entered correctly This setting is case sensitive 8 If Relay Broadcast is not forwarding e mail to a G3 Fax check the Relay Broadcast settings and Relay Domain registration A Relay Domain must be entered for this function to work 9 The Relay Broadcasting and Broadcasting features cannot be used at the same time 10 Relay Broadcast can support the relay of a document up to a maximum of 48 Fax machines through conventional telephone lines If sending to more than 48 locations the sender must divide the t
192. ith a between main normal part PCB and NCU PCB properly connected Connection 5 Main PCB and control panel PCB are properly connected Fix the connection properly between main PCB and control panel PCB Harness between main PCB and control panel PCB Connection of 7 FPC key is properly FPC key FPC key Harness wire is damaged Replace the harness with a normal part Fix the connection properly connected Replacement of FPC key LA Replace the FPC key with a solves the problem normal part NCU PCB EN i solves the problem a normal part Control panel Replacement of contro panel PCB PCB solves the problem PCB with a normal part F 3 FAX can t be received Yes Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes es User Check 1 Verify that the telephone cord is securely inserted Receive mode 1 Receive mode is set to oet the receive mode to setting automatic receive mode automatic receive mode solves the problem a normal part solves the problem a normal part NO Yes es 6 27 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING Step Result than 0 Ring volume is set to OFF Yes Set the ring volume to other than OFF Connection 3 Main PCB and scanner unit No Fix the connection properly between main are properly connected PCB and scanner unit Harness 4 Harness wire is damaged Replace the harness with a between main normal part PCB and scanner unit Connection 5 Main PCB and NCU PCB are Fix
193. k markings on the white level reference film inside the scanner top cover Not used ADF Auto Document Feeder scanning position detection failure D TI MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL e of paper Regist sensor EX PCB E6 Write error in EEPROM Write error in EEPROM in EEPROM e Driver PCB PCB pa Data scanning error during transmission CIS Document removed at phase B Main PCB F5 EOL not found during page memory e Replace the main PCB if this error transfer occurs frequently FG PC interface error e Interface cable e Main PCB Not used Scanner motor error detected FF Memory management error e Replace the main PCB if this error occurs frequently 6 9 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 PAPER PROBLEMS 3 1 Paper Loading Problems First make sure that you are using paper that meets Brother recommended paper specifications See 2 3 Paper in Chapter 1 The machine does not feed paper The machine does not feed paper from the manual feed tray The machine will not feed envelopes A paper jam has occurred The machine does not print into the top output tray The machine does not feed paper from the lower tray properly Only when the lower tray which is optional is used The Check original message is displayed although a document is set Document not fed Document double feeding Document jam e f there is paper in the paper tray make sure it is straight If
194. l Center to the task tray See AutoLoad the Brother Control Center Chapter 4 in the Documentation Software User s Guide located on the CD ROM OK A Basic Universal printer driver was installed with the MFL PRO Software Suite which is certified for use with Windows operating systems Brother also offers a fully featured printer driver Native driver that includes more features than the Basic Universal driver However this driver does not include a Windows certificate To install the Brother Native driver proceed to step 23 NOTE For details on what features are available see chapter 2 of the Software User s Guide Brother Native driver Installation 23 Click Start and select Settings and then Printers Click on Add Printer and the Add Printer Wizard will start When this screen appears click Next 24 Un check the Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer selection and then click Next 25 Select USBXXX from the pull down window for the Printer Port Selection and then click Next 26 _ Click on Have Disk 27 Browse the CD ROM and highlight your language folder and click Open Highlight the W2K folder and click Open Highlight the Addprt folder and click Open 28 Click Open 2 15 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND BASIC OPERATION 29 Make sure X ENGW2K Addprt is displayed in the window and click OK XA is the drive letter of your CD ROM 30 Highlight the model you are installing fr
195. l number that is not programmed A page piece of paper or paper clip etc may be jammed inside the machine Set up the One Touch or Speed Dial number Open the front cover If you see any jammed paper or other item gently pull it out then close the front cover lfthe error message remains open and close the front cover again If the machine cannot reset itself and return to the date and time prompt it will display Machine Error XX Refer to 2 2 Error Codes Shown in the MACHINE ERROR X X message Paper Jam The paper is jammed in the See Paper Jams on page 6 11 machine Toner Empty Toner Low Toner cartridge is not installed OR Toner is used up and printing is not possible If the LCD shows Toner Low you can still print But the toner is depleted and the machine is telling you that the toner will soon run out 6 5 Reinstall the toner cartridge OR Replace the toner cartridge with a new one Order a new toner cartridge now CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 2 Error Codes Shown in the MACHINE ERROR X X message If the LCD shows the PLS OPEN COVER message you can display the detailed error code following the MACHINE ERROR by using the maintenance mode function code 82 described in Chapter 7 Section 3 16 NOTE e When checking a PCB as instructed in the Check column check its harness also e To check sensors use the maintenance mode function code 32 described
196. ld be exercised even if the power switch is OFF because it is a single pole switch Xi MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 OVERVIEW Front View Control panel ADF document support Telephone handset Control panel cover ADF document output support Face tput tra Manual feed tray ace down output tray Power switch Paper tray Face down output tray support Flap with extension Support flap Front cover Fig 1 1 Back View Paper guides External telephone line jack AC power connector Handset jack Telephone line jack Face up output tray USB interface connector Back output tray Side cover Parallel interface connector Fig 1 2 1 1 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 SPECIFICATIONS General Memory Capacity Optional Memory ADF Paper Tray Printer Type LCD Warm up Power Source Power Consumption Dimensions Weight Noise 32 MB DIMM slot Max 160 MB Up to 30 pages 250 Sheets 201b Laser 16 characters x 2 lines Max 18 seconds at 73 4 F 23 C 120V AC 50 60Hz U S A Canada Version only 220 to 240V AC 50 60Hz Europe Version only Average Operating Copying 440W or less 25 C Plain paper Peak 1090W or less Sleep 6W or less Standby 75W or less 25 C 431 x 451 x 335 mm U S A Canada Version only 375 x 451 x 335 mm Europe Version only Without Drum Toner Unit 11 6kg Operating 53dBA or less Standby 30dBA or less Environm
197. llow the appropriate set of instructions to remove it Original is jammed in the ADF Automatic document feeder 1 Open the control panel cover 2 Pull the jammed document to the front and remove it 3 Close the control panel cover and press Stop Exit button Paper Jams Clearing jammed paper Clear the jammed paper following the procedures below 1 Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine 2 Pull the jammed paper up and out of the machine ANN WA N Fig 6 2 6 11 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 Press the front cover release button and then open the front cover 4 Pull out the drum unit Pull the jammed paper up and out of the machine If you cannot remove the drum unit easily at this time do not use extra force Instead pull the edge of the jammed paper from the paper tray caution To prevent damage to the machine caused by static electricity do not touch the electrodes shown in Figure 6 4 6 12 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL b Open the back output tray Pull the jammed paper out of the fixing unit If the paper jam can be cleared go to Step 7 NOTE If you have to pull the paper toward the back of the machine the fuser may get dirty with toner powder and it may scatter on the next printouts Print a few copies of the test page until the scattering of toner stops caution After you have just used the machine some internal parts of the machine are extremely hot Wai
198. llowing cases increase the possibility of this problem e Acid paper is being used e The drum unit is at the end of its life e here is dust or paper powder 6 46 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL I 19 Hollow print User Check 1 Check the paper used meets the recommended paper specifications 2 Select the Thick paper mode in the printer driver or use thinner paper than you X2 are currently using 3 Check the machine s environment conditions such as high humidity may cause this situation to occur Paper 1 Is thick paper of more than 158 Yes Hecommend to use the g m being used or extremely specified types of paper Refer and compare with 1 15 rough surface paper 1 20 Downward fogging of solid black Toner cartridge 1 Is the problem solved after Ye Replace the toner cartridge failure replacing the toner cartridge High voltage power supply PCB failure S Is the problem solved after Yes Replace the high voltage power replacing the high voltage supply PCB power supply PCB 6 47 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING Horizontal lines Paper feed roller Are the paper feed roller shaft No Check the connection connection and the ground connected between the shaft and failure correctly the ground Also check the ground on the back of the paper feed roller No M Clean the electrodes failure connecting correctly
199. mode 15 4 lines mm If it is set to 0 it communicates in native superfine mode e Selector 7 Max document length limitation This selector is used to select the maximum length of a document to be sent e Selector 8 Stop key pressed during reception If this selector is set to 1 pressing the Stop Exit button can stop the current receiving operation The received data will be lost A 22 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL WSW17 Function setting 2 1 No alarm o Off hook alarm Always valid Valid except when call reservation is selected 3 E o e ma SSD e A e Selectors 1 and 2 Off hook alarm These selectors activate or deactivate the alarm function which sounds an alarm when the handset is off the hook after the communication is completed The off hook alarm works also for an external telephone connected to the EXT modular Socket e Selector 5 Calendar clock type If this selector is set to 0 USA the MM DD YY hh mm format applies if it is set to 1 Europe the DD MM YY hh mm format applies DD is the day MM is the month YY is the last two digits of the year hh is the hour and mm is the minute e Selector 7 Non ring reception oetting this selector to 1 makes the machine receive calls without ringer sound if the ring delay is set to O A 23 APPENDIX 3 FIRMWARE SWITCHS WSW WSW18 Function setting 3 Detection enabled time for CNG and no tone No detection Registration
200. mu diese ersetzt werden Das Geh use der Lasereinheit darf nicht ge ffnet werden da sonst Laserstrahlen austreten k nnen Location of the laser beam window A X ADDITIONAL INFORMATION When servicing the optical system of the printer be careful not to place a screwdriver or other reflective object in the path of the laser beam Be sure to take off any personal accessories such as watches and rings before working on the printer A reflected beam though invisible can permanently damage the eyes Since the beam is invisible the following caution label is attached on the laser unit D ANG ER INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCK DEFEATED AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT G E F AH R UNSICHTBARE LASERSTHAHLUNG WENN GEOFFNET UND VERRIEGELUNG GEL ST DIREKTEN KONTAKT MIT DEM LASERSTRAHL VERMEIDEN LASERGER T KLASSE 3B D ANG E R RAYONNEMENT LASER INVISIBLE LORSQUE L APPAREIL EST OUVERT OU ENDOMMAGE EVITER TOUTES EXPOSITIONS DIRECTES AU FAISCEAU PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 3B VARNING OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING NAR DEN HAR DELEN AR OPPNAD OCH SP RRAR AR URKOPPLADE UNDVIK DIREKT EXPONERING AV STRALAR KLASS 3B LASERAPPARAT F A R E USYNLIG LASERSTRALE NAR MASKINEN ER PEN OG DEKSELBRYTERE AKTIVERT UNNGA DIREKTE EKSPONERING AV LASERSTRALEN KLASSE 3B LASER PRODUKT ATT E NTI E ONZICHTBARE LASER STRALING BiJ OPENING EN OMZEILDE BEVEILIGING VOORKOM DIRECTE BLOOTSTELLING AAN STRAAL KLASSE 3B LASERA
201. n 4 1 CES s a Ai OA 4 2 BS DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE EE 4 3 A O o ME 4 3 O Bn 4 3 A A A 4 4 34 ee REENEN 4 13 3 5 Access Cover Battery ASS Meri ee 4 14 36 C ntrolPanel ASSY EE 4 16 3 7 Document SCAN moins RR 4 21 EE 4 26 39 Rear cover O sita kanna r R r RRR 4 27 MS VR Y Me 4 28 Mid TO GOV CUP ERR 4 29 3 12 Front Cover ASS EE 4 33 A PPP odie venient anaes 4 34 SEW lie A A nny t A A a a URN 4 35 A al n a n ere 4 44 5 16 Man PCB A OD Y aisla 4 45 3 17 Base Plate LV Insulation Gheet ennemis 4 47 318 Engine POB ASS A nn 4 48 3 19 High voltage PS PCB ASSY EE 4 49 3 20 Low voltage PS PCB ASSY 1u1a1issintnsinstannskandusnstaunsn sanikunakan k u kanikanakandknn kivn ndannikunakandnundi 4 49 o o VR Lm mS 4 51 3 22 Frame L Drive UNI 2 112 a ai ni T A e SEE 4 58 S dun ee e o 0 E 4 62 3 24 Fan Motor 60 Unit LV Fan Motor 60 Un 4 62 3 20 PIM Asia tonada 4 63 SA II A eee er tae 4 65 5 GUIDELINES F R LEAD FREE SOLDER ai 4 66 D SCREW TORQUE LIST eones 4 69 T BA ON aa 4 70 c AARNE SS ROUTING bb 4 71 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL CHAPTER 5 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 5 1 ls CON UNABLE Arpa 5 1 US EDD e BCO ME GOES En IIA 5 1 US MENTO de iet m m 5 4 2 PERIODICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS ocaso seas 5 7 AT cdm AS 5 8 22 Paper el ie ENa E 5 16 3 PERIODICAL OLE
202. nal utility a web browser or TELNET 2 Make sure that the MAC address of the Windows setting is the same as shown in the print configuration page printout Web Browser Troubleshooting TCP IP 1 If you cannot connect to the print fax server using your web browser it may be worth checking the Proxy Settings of your browser Look in the Exceptions setting and if necessary type in the IP address of the print ax server This will stop your PC from trying to connect to your ISP or proxy server every time you wish to look at the print fax server 2 Make sure that you are using the proper Web Browser we recommend Netscape Navigator version 4 0 or later Microsoft Internet Explorer version 4 0 or later 6 59 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 10 15 Internet Fax Troubleshooting 1 lf there is a mail delivery error while sending an Internet Fax the mail server will send an error message back to the machine and the error message will be printed If there is an error while receiving mail an error message is printed Ex The message being sent to the machine was not in a TIFF F format All documents transmitted to the machine via e mail must be in a TIFF F format 2 If an error message is printed while receiving e mail text from a PC ATTACHED FILE FORMAT NOT SUPPORTED the senders mail application may not be set for a Plain Text format or Vcard the virtual business card feature may be set to ON 3 If the receivers mail system
203. ng level to be applied if the machine fails to send training due to weak line connection If these selectors are set to 0 X the modem will automatically set the appropriate training level e Selector 3 Sending level of guard tone at phase 2 This selector sets the sending level of guard tone for 1800 Hz to be sent at Phase 2 in the V 34 mode e Selector 4 Stepping down the transmission speed at fallback each This selector determines how much the modem steps down the transmission speed at falloack when called by the remote station If this selector is set to 1 the modem may step down the transmission speed from 33600 bps to 28800 bps by one time fallback e Selectors 5 and 6 Automatic control of modem s EQM gain for proper transmission speed choice These selectors determine how the modem controls the EQM Eye Quality Monitor gain for proper choice of the transmission speed which applies if the modem selects higher transmission speed than the possible speed so that it always repeats falling back A 39 APPENDIX 3 FIRMWARE SWITCHS WSW WSW39 Function setting 17 2400 bps 4800 bps 7200 bps 9600 bps 12000 bps 14400 bps 16800 bps 19200 bps 21600 bps 24000 bps 26400 bps 28800 bps 31200 bps 33600 bps 33600 bps 33600 bps First transmission speed choice for fallback Last transmission speed choice for fallback A sch cb cb ch 4 sch DN OO OO O OOO UI 2 6 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
204. o P place If you put it in properly the lock F lever will lift automatically Make sure S E you fit the toner cartridge properly or it may separate from the drum unit D Fig 5 11 Clean the primary corona wire inside the drum unit by gently sliding the blue tab from right to left several times Return the tab to the home position before you put the drum unit back in the machine If you do not printed pages may have a vertical stripe I Home position Fig 5 12 5 5 CHAPTER 5 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 8 Put the drum unit back in the machine Close the front cover of the machine caution Handle the drum unit and toner cartridge carefully If toner scatters on your hands or clothes wipe or wash it off with cold water immediately Be sure to seal the toner cartridge tightly so that toner powder does not spill out of the cartridge Dispose of the used toner cartridge in accordance with local plastic waste regulations Only unpack a toner cartridge immediately before you need to install it into the machine lf a toner cartridge is left unpacked for a long period of time the toner life is shortened If an unpacked drum unit is subjected to excessive direct sunlight or room light the unit may be damaged Use a Brother genuine toner cartridge which is specially formulated to ensure top print quality Printing with a 3rd party toner or toner cartridge may reduce not only the printing quality but also the qu
205. ocument 1 3 2 6 2 Specifications for ADF 1 4 Pe iO A 1 4 A A E A 1 4 29 Consumable TEINS iii 1 4 ha Wed 1 5 2AT PAPO e pe O mu o o OE Y 1 5 2 11 1 Feedable paper E 1 5 SE EE EE 1 7 ca Paper outil E 1 7 2 12 PAmable A a ida 1 7 2 13 Print Speeds with Various Settings aainaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaanaaaaaaaaaaunaaaananaaaunaaaaaaaaaaanaaaa 1 8 2 14 Toner Cartridge Weight Intormmaion intaia 1 8 a VERA NO DESCRIPTION TT m 1 9 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND BASIC OPERATION 2 1 1 CONDITIONS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION eerernmR 2 1 ll PONE Te EE 2 1 Te A e Re RN OP UA E EI A 2 1 1 3 System Requirements for Brother Printer Solution cccoonnoononnccnnncccnnononncnnnnnnnnonnnnnnos 2 2 NEE postas diodo bios 2 3 ILR 2 5 del PAUSO a R 2 5 3 11 e ee he SUD DONS oratorio 2 6 3 1 2 Installing the Handeet nennen nnne nnn nnne nnn nnn nnn 2 7 3 1 3 Installing the Drum Unit Assembly aaaanaaaaaaaaanaaa naaaananaananananaunanannanannanananananannananannannanaa 2 7 3 1 4 Load Paper in the Paper Tray aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaanannanananaaaanananaananananannaananananannananannaaananaaa 2 9 3 1 5 Installing the Power Cord and Phone Une 2 11 3 2 Installing the Driver amp Software unaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaanaaaaaaaaauuaaaaaaaaunnuaanaaananunaaaaanaaauuaaaa 2 13 3 2 1 For USB Interface Cable Users For Windows
206. of the Equipment s Log Information Maintenance mode 80 lt Function gt The equipment may display its log information on the LCD lt Operating Procedure gt 1 2 Press the 8 and 0 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode The USB serial number appears on the LCD Press the Start button Each time the Start button is pressed one of the following log information items appears on the LCD in the order given below 1 Jam count indicating how many times a paper jam has been occurred 2 Page count indicating how many pages the photosensitive drum has been printed 3 Total page count indicating how many pages the equipment has been printed since produced 4 Drum count indicating how many times the photosensitive drum has been rotated 5 Drum change count indicating how many times drum replacement has been made 6 Toner change count indicating how many times toner replacement has been made 7 Copy page count indicating how many copies have been made 8 PC print page count indicating how many pages the equipment has been printed as an output device of the connected PC FAX page count indicating how many received FAX pages have been printed 10 Error code of the most recent machine error 11 Error code of the most recent communications error 2 12 ADF jam count indicating how many times a document jam has been occurred 2 13 ADF page count indicating how many documents have
207. oint of the lead free solder is higher The temperature of the soldering iron s tip is restricted to the temperature that the component to be soldered can resist It should be noted that the temperature that the components to be soldered with lead free solder can resist has not increased even though the melting point of the solder has A soldering iron must be correctly applied Even though the melting point of the solder has increased soldering operations must be performed with the soldering iron s tip at the same temperature as prescribed before Therefore heat needs to be effectively applied from the tip of the soldering iron to the base metal For effective heat application the shape of the soldering iron s tip and application of the soldering iron position and angle relative to the base metal need to be more strictly controlled than before The soldered point must be left as it is after the soldering iron is removed for a period of time longer than that required when soldering is performed with conventional solder The amount of heat applied to the base metal increases due to the higher melting point of the lead free solder and the base metal is heated to higher temperatures Consequently it takes time for the melted solder to cool and to solidify and therefore the soldered area must be left as it is after the soldering iron is removed for a longer period of time A localized ventilation system and gloves are required for soldering opera
208. om the list of machines and click Next NOTE Make sure you select a USB printer 31 The model you are installing will be listed in the window Select Yes or No if you want this driver to be your default printer and then click Next 32 _ lf this screen appears select Do not share this printer and Next 33 Select Yes and Next to print a test page 34 When this screen appears click Finish 35 Ifthe Digital Signature Not Found dialog box appears click Yes 36 Ifthe test page printed click OK NOTE e There will be two Brother printer drivers listed in the Printers selection e The driver with Printer after the model name ex Brother MFC 8220 Printer is the Brother Native Driver OK The Brother Native Drivers have been installed and the installation is now complete lt For Windows XP Users Only gt Make sure that you followed the instructions in 1 to 16 on pages 2 13 to 2 14 17 When this screen appears connect the USB interface cable to your PC and then connect it to the machine Plug the machine into the AC power outlet Turn the power switch on It will take a few seconds for the installation screen to appear The installation of the Brother drivers will automatically start The screen appears one after another please wait for a while 18 The README file will be displayed Please read this file for troubleshooting information and then close the file to continue installation 19 Check the
209. oner cartridge with a new one be sure to clean the scanner window 1 Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord 2 Press the front cover release button and then open the front cover 3 Pull the drum unit out of the machine caution It is recommended to place the drum unit on a piece of disposable paper or cloth in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner 9 21 CHAPTER 5 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 4 Gently wipe the scanner window with a soft dry cloth Fig 5 37 5 Re install the drum unit into the machine Close the front cover 6 Plug in the power cord and then turn on the power switch caution e Handle the drum unit carefully since it contains toner If toner scatters and your hands or cloths get dirty immediately wipe or wash it off with cold water e Do not touch the scanner window with your fingers e Do not wipe the scanner window with isopropyl alcohol 3 5 Cleaning the Electrical Terminals To obtain the best print performance be sure to clean the electrical terminals inside the machine 1 Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord 2 Remove the drum unit from the machine 3 Wipe the electrical terminals as shown in the figure below with a soft dry cloth Fig 5 38 9 22 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 4 MTBF MTTR The meantime between failure MTBF and the meantime to repair MT TR for this machine are as follows MTBF Up to 4 000 hours MTTR Avera
210. onfined within the protective housing and external covers the laser beam cannot escape form the machine during any phase of user operation FDA REGULATIONS 110 120V MODEL ONLY The US Food and Drug Administration FDA has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured on and after August 2 1976 Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States One of the following labels on the back of the printer indicates compliance with the FDA regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States The label for Japanese manufactured products MANUFACTURED BROTHER INDUSTRIES LTD 15 1 Naeshiro cho Mizuho ku Nagoya 467 8561 Japan This product complies with FDA radiation performance standards 21 CFR Subchapter J The label for Chinese manufactured products MANUFACTURED BROTHER Corporation Asia Ltd Shenzen Buji Nan Ling Factory Gold Garden Ind Nan Ling Village Buji Rong Gang Shenzen CHINA This product complies with FDA radiation performance standards 21 CFR Subchapter J Caution Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure viii MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL IEC 825 220 240V MODEL ONLY This printer is a Class laser product as defined in IEC 825 specifications The label shown below is attached in countries where required CLASS 1LASERP RODUCT APPAREIL
211. only when the flash function is selected for the R key by using the function switch A 9 APPENDIX 3 FIRMWARE SWITCHS WSW WSWO5 1st dial tone and busy tone detection 3 5 sec WAIT 7 0 sec WAIT 10 5 sec WAIT 14 0 sec WAIT 17 5 sec WAIT 21 0 sec WAIT 24 5 sec WAIT Detection Without WAIT Z O 1st dial tone detection zu 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 sch OO OC ON O eh OO O O O No detection Detection only after dialing No detection Detection before and after dialing Busy tone detection in auto 0 Yes matic receiving mode O NOTE Selectors 5 through 7 are not applicable in those countries where no busy tone detection is supported Busy tone detection in auto matic sending mode e Selectors 1 through 3 1st dial tone detection These selectors activate or deactivate the 1st dial tone detection function which detects the 1st dial tone issued from the PSTN when a line is connected to the PSTN oetting all of these selectors to 1 activates the dial tone detection function so that the machine starts dialing upon detection of a dial tone when a line is connected For the detecting conditions of the 1st dial tone refer to WSW07 and WSWOS Other setting combinations deactivate the dial tone detection function so that the machine starts dialing after the specified WAIT 3 5 7 0 10 5 14 0 17 5 21 0 or 24 5 seconds without detection of a dial tone when a line is connected to the PST
212. ower supply PCB CIS unit Is the problem occurring on Y Replace the CIS CIS replacement Is the scanner mirror broken or loose Toner cartridge 4 Is the problem solved after Yes Replace the toner failure replacing the toner cartridge cartridge with a new one es Reconnect the connector correctly 6 34 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 4 All black User Check 1 Clean the corona wire of the drum unit 2 The drum unit may be damaged Install a new drum unit Ground Corona wire 1 Is the corona wire dirty Clean the corona wire 2 failure with the wire cleaner Yes Yes 3 Are the charge electrodes Yes Clean both electrodes between the machine and the 3 drum unit dirty Harness 4 Is the laser unit connected to No Connect the harness connection the main PCB correctly and the main PCB correctly Mi i Main PCB Is the problem solved after Yes Replace the main failure replacing the main PCB PCB CIS unit 7 Is the problem occurring on Yes Replace the CIS CIS replacement 2 Is the corona wire broken Replace the drum unit NM between the laser unit a High voltage 5 Is the problem solved after Replace the high power supply replacing the high voltage voltage power supply PCB failure power supply PCB PCB 6 35 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 5 Dirt on the back of paper Fixing unit dirty Is the pressure roller dirty Clean the pressure roller referring to the following Is any other area in the procedur
213. per pick up roller ASSY Roller collar Bush R Fig 5 31 5 Mount the pad holder and the separation pad spring to the paper tray Pad holder Separation pad spring N O Y Zo Y W SES a Fig 5 32 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 6 Insert the paper tray Ze uum Front cover ASSY Paper Tray Fig 5 33 7 Insert the power cord to the machine Power cord Fig 5 34 9 19 CHAPTER 5 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 3 PERIODICAL CLEANING Clean the following parts periodically to avoid any machine problems or print image defects caution While drum unit and scanner window cleaning basically can be implemented by the end user the electrical terminals inside the machine and on the drum unit should be cleaned by a service technician Instruct the users not to touch those terminals ZN WARNING There are high voltage electrodes inside the machine Before cleaning the machine make sure that the power switch has been turned off and the power cord has been unplugged from the power outlet 3 1 Cleaning the Machine Exterior Clean the machine exterior to keep the machine clean 1 Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord 2 Wipe dirt and dust away from the machine exterior with a damp cloth and allow the machine to dry completely before turning the power on again 3 Plugin the power cord caution e Use water or neutral detergents for cleaning Cleaning with volatile liquids
214. ply The high voltage power supply generates and outputs the voltages and currents for the charging development and transfer functions For the circuit diagram of the high voltage power supply PCB see APPENDIX 4 13 and 4 14 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY PCB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM in this manual Current Regulator 24V Regulator Current Regulator EK T402 Q405 Voltage Regulator MEK T401 Q407 GND Voltage Regulator x Z301 VR302 Voltage Regulator Fig 3 18 CO Transfer Roller Cleaning Brush Photosensitive Drum Development Roller MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 2 MECHANICS 2 1 Overview of Printing Mechanism Heat roller a Second eject roller SCANNER UNIT Scanner motor Blade DRUM UNIT Ee Development roller T Supply roller i 4 A Paper feed pinch roller Regist front actuator O Rear cover AE First feed pinch roller First eject roller FIXING UNIT LOS First feed roller og NI Y IN Separation pad Pressure plate Pressure roller Cassette pressure roller PAPER TRAY ER Paper Photosensitive d rum Transfer roller Regist rear Paper Feed roller actuator Cleaner Fig 3 19 3 13 CHAPTER 3 THEORY OF OPERATION 2 2 ADF document support 2 2 1 2 2 2 Scanner Mechanism Document front sensor actuator ADF parts Document feed roller ASSY Nip related parts Document Document rear sensor a
215. port is set for the selected printer driver Check that the machine is not connected to the same port which is also connected to a mass storage device or scanner Remove all other devices and connect the port to the machine only Turn off the printer status monitor in the device options tab in the printer driver If the print port is set as an ECP port change it to a normal port Try printing the test page referring to 3 4 Test Pattern 1 in Chapter 7 Try resetting the factory settings Failure inside Is it possible to print the test Identify the error type then the machine page with the method of 3 4 refer to the specified section of Test Pattern 1 in Chapter 7 this chapter 6 51 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING Unable to print full pages of a document with the MEMORY FULL message User Check 1 Menu and 2 8 6 and 4 keys are pushed to show maintenance mode and then 5 and 3 keys are pushed to transmit the data See 3 10 Chapter 7 2 Reduce the complexity of your document or reduce the machine resolution 3 Expand the printer memory by adding a commercially available DIMM NOTE This problem may appear if the data is too complex Unable to Check the memory size in Print Expand the memory size by recognize DIMM Configuration Is it the default adding DIMM Size If the memory is already at the maximum size it will be impossible to print the data under the machine specifications DIMM main
216. ps intermittently Upon completion of the downloading the machine beeps continuously NOTE If the machine cannot return to the standby state after completion of downloading turn the power off and on A 3 APPENDIX 2 INSTALLING THE UPDATE DATA 2 2 1 2 2 SETTING ID CODES TO MACHINES Brother driver machines are assigned unique ID codes character strings at the factory If you replace the main PCB of the machine the machine will lose its assigned ID code so that it will not be identified by the connected PC You need to assign a unique ID code character string to the machine according to the procedure given here For models covered by this manual set serial numbers given to individual machines as ID codes ID codes are essential when more than one machine is connected to a single PC via USB Please check the printer driver of MFC 8220 is installed in a host computer before working When not installed Please install a printer driver in a host computer before working Connecting the Machine to Your PC See the illustration on page A 2 1 Make sure that your PC is turned off 2 Make sure that the power cord of the machine is unplugged from a wall socket or other power source 3 Connect the parallel interface cable to the parallel port on the back of the machine and secure it with the lock wires 4 Connect the other end of the interface cable to the printer port of your PC and secure it with the two
217. r The pitch which appears in the image 29 97 mm 94 1 mm 6 presa moler o250mm 78 5 mm 6 31 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 3 Troubleshooting Image Defect oeveral types of the image defects can be cleared by end users For those defects instruct the user to check the User Check items described in each table Even if the same image defect appears the following procedures should be followed in the event of specific image defects See also subsection 8 4 Location of Ground Contacts in this Chapter for information about the location of the grounding contacts caution When using the machine for a special job such as printing of name cards print quality cannot be guaranteed User Check 1 Check the printer s environment Conditions such as humidity high temperatures etc may cause this situation to occur 2 If the whole page is light toner save mode may be on Disable toner save mode within Printer Properties tab of the driver 3 Try installing a new toner cartridge or drum unit S Toner sensing 1 Can printing be started with the Check if the toner failure drum unit and toner cartridge sensor is dirty and machine side removed check the toner sensor connection Toner sensing The wiper of the toner failure toner cartridge side Is the problem solved when 4 or 5 pages are printed after the toner cartridge is replaced with a full one cartridge is defective Replace the tone
218. r cartridge High voltage 4 Is the harness connection power supply PCB failure Replace the high between the high voltage power supply PCB and the engine PCB correct voltage power supply PCB Replace the engine PCB or the main PCB Engine PCB Is the harness connection Main PCB between the engine PCB and failure the main PCB correct Dirt on the Is there any dirt on the scanner scanner window window Laser unit failure 7 Is the problem solved after replacing the laser unit Wipe it off with a soft clean paper Replace the laser unit Drum 3 Are all the contacts between No Clean contact 1 4 connection the drum unit and machine electrodes both on the CX failure connected correctly drum unit and in the 5 6 machine 5 6 la 6 32 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 2 Dark Possible cause Corona wire failure contact failure Drum unit failure Toner cartridge failure High voltage power supply PCB failure Main PCB failure Engine PCB failure User Check 1 Check the paper used meets the recommended paper specifications 2 Check the machine s environment High temperature and high humidity conditions can increase the amount of background shading 3 Clean the corona wire with the wire cleaner 4 Try installing a new toner cartridge or drum unit Are the charge electrodes Clean both electrodes 3 between the machine and the Replace the drum unit with a new one
219. r cartridge is installed in the drum unit Toner sensor Light reception Toner sensor Light emission Fig 3 25 3 17 CHAPTER 3 THEORY OF OPERATION 2 4 3 Cassette sensor Paper empty sensor Detect if the paper tray is installed They also detect if there is paper in the paper tray Paper empty sensor Cassette sensor PCB ASSY Cassette sensor Fig 3 26 2 4 4 Paper eject sensor Detects if paper is ejected from the fixing unit Eject sensor PCB ASSY Fig 3 27 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 2 4 5 Document front sensor Document rear sensor It detects that a document is placed on the ADF Document front sensor It detects that a document is finished to be fed Document rear sensor Document front sensor Fig 3 28 2 4 6 Regist sensor It detects whether paper is fed from the paper tray or the manual feed tray Engine PCB ASSY Regist sensor Fig 3 29 3 19 CHAPTER 3 THEORY OF OPERATION 2 5 2 5 1 2 5 2 2 5 3 2 5 4 2 6 2 7 2 7 1 Drum Unit Photosensitive drum Generates the latent electrostatic image and develops the image on the drum surface Primary charger Forms a uniform charge on the drum surface 1 Corona wire Generates the ion charge on the drum 2 Grid opreads the ion charge evenly over the drum surface Transfer roller Transfers the toner image to the paper from the drum surface Cleaner Removes the paper dust or dirt on the surf
220. r used meets the recommended paper specifications A rough surfaced paper may cause the problem 2 The toner cartridge may be damaged Install a new toner cartridge 3 The drum unit may be damaged or may be nearly at the end of life Install a new drum unit 6 49 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 4 Location of Grounding Contacts 8 4 1 Drum unit 2 Wire cleaner Drum Unit 4 Development roller 1 Photosensitive drum 6 Transfer roller Fig 6 13 8 4 2 Machine body amp Paper tray 5 Grid 8 Cleaner 4 Development roller 1 Photosensitive drum 6 Transfer roller A gt CS Fig 6 14 Paper Tray 6 50 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 9 INCORRECT PRINTOUT When the data is not printed correctly as it is seen on the PC screen follow the procedures below in the event of a specific error P 1 The machine prints unexpectedly or it prints garbage User Check Check if the printer cable is not too long It is recommended to use a parallel cable of less than 2 meters 6 6 feet in length Check that the printer cable is not damaged or broken Check also that the printer cable is connected to the correct interface connectors of both the machine and PC If an interface switching device is used remove it and connect the computer directly to the machine and try again Check that the appropriate printer driver is selected as Set as Default Check also that the correct print
221. ransmission locations into 48 locations or less for each relay broadcast 11 When receiving e mail messages from the POP3 server the machine can receive a maximum of 32 mail messages lf there are more than 32 mail messages in the POP3 server the machine will receive a maximum of 32 mail massages and then receive the remaining after the next polling interval 12 The NC 9100h print fax server requires a portion of the user memory for operation With the NC 9100h installed the number of fax sheets that can be sent or received will be reduced by approximately 30 pages of the brother No 1 Test Chart from the standard machine capacity 6 60 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL CHAPTER 7 MAINTENANCE MODE 1 ENTRY INTO THE MAINTENANCE MODE To make the machine enter the maintenance mode press the Menu button 2 8 6 and 4 keys in this order I Within 2 seconds gt The machine beeps for approx one second and displays MN MAINTENANCE EEE on the LCD indicating that it is placed in the initial stage of the maintenance mode a mode in which the machine is ready to accept entry from the keys To select one of the maintenance mode functions listed in Section 2 enter the corresponding 2 digit function code with the numerical keys on the control panel The details of each maintenance mode function are described in Section 3 NOTE e Pressing the 9 key twice in the initial stage of the maintenance mode makes the machine exit from the ma
222. re gt 1 If the user s machine has a transmission related problem call the user s machine at a remote location from your machine 2 Ifthe line is connected have the user perform the following 1 Hook up to the external phone 2 Press the Menu button Enlarge Reduce button and 0 keys in this order 3 Press the 8 and 7 keys The above operation makes the user s machine send CNG to your machine for sending the transmission log 3 If you hear the CNG sent from the user s machine press the Start button of your machine Your machine will start to receive the transmission log from the user s machine 7 25 CHAPTER 7 MAINTENANCE MODE 3 18 Cancellation of the Memory Security Mode Not applicable to the Japanese version lt Function gt This procedure can cancel the memory security mode Use this procedure if the user forgets his her password entered when setting the memory security mode so as not to exit from the memory security mode NOTE Carrying out this procedure will lose passwords previously entered but retain FAX messages received in the memory security mode lt Operating Procedure gt 1 When the SECURE MODE is displayed on the LCD hold down the Menu button and press the key Within two seconds start to press the 2 7 9 0 and 0 keys The memory security mode will be canceled and the machine returns to the calendar clock screen 7 26 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL APPENDIX 1 EEPROM CUSTO
223. re below If the joint 5 is mounted in a wrong orientation it might cause a paper jam Joint 5 Fig 4 103 4 56 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 29 Remove the chute cover Chute cover Fig 4 104 30 Remove the regist front actuator and regist front actuator spring 31 Remove the regist rear actuator and regist rear actuator spring Fig 4 105 NOTE When assembling the regist front actuator and the regist rear actuator set the spring as shown in the figure Regist rear actuator spring Regist rear actuator Hole 4 Hole Regist front actuator Regist front actuator spring Fig 4 106 4 57 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 3 22 Frame L Drive Unit 1 Remove the main PCB sheet from the main frame L unit 2 Remove the four bind B M4x12 Taptite screws 3 Remove the two bind B M3x10 Taptite screws and then remove the main frame L unit Main frame L unit Main PCB sheet ger Se Taptite bind B b e Taptite bind B M4x12 4 Taptite bind B M3x10 Fig 4 107 Under bar 4 58 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL Remove the cup S M3x6 Taptite screw and then remove the ground spring Remove the six bind B M4x12 Taptite screws Remove the cup S M3x6 Taptite screw Remove the cup S M3x6 Taptite screw and then remove the sub gear plate Remove the LD harness 5P from the drive unit Remove the drive unit Drive unit Taptite cup S M3x6 LD harne
224. ror report This selector determines whether or not the 1st page image data of a document will be printed out onto the error report if the document image data stored in the temporary memory cannot be transmitted normally e Selector 2 Erasure of the stored image data of an unsent document at the time of the subsequent in memory message transmission If in memory message transmission fails repeatedly when selector 1 is set to 1 the temporary memory will be occupied with image data Setting selector 2 to 1 will automatically erase the stored 1st page image data of an unsent document at the time of the subsequent in memory message transmission only when recording paper or toner runs out A 38 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL WSW38 Function setting 16 No 1 2 Setting of the equalizer 0 X Automatic 1 0 Fixed to 4 points 1 1 Fixed to 16 points otepping down the transmission speed at fallback each setting For lower transmission speed than the current setting For further lower transmission than the setting made by 1 0 Redialing when a communications a l OFE 0 ON 1 OFF CED detection for CNG stoppage NOTE WSW38 takes effect only in the V 34 mode speed choice 1 2 For higher transmission speed l than the current setting 5 Automatic control of modem s No change from the current 6 EQM gain for proper transmission e Selectors 1 and 2 Setting of the equalizer These selectors set the equalizer s traini
225. rrugation pinch roller L R and pinch roller holder Corrugation pinch roller L R Pinch roller holder Inner chute Fig 4 57 4 32 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 10 Remove the paper stopper and the paper stopper S Paper stopper lt gt q M Paper stopper S Fig 4 58 3 12 Front Cover ASSY 1 Release the link 2 Remove the front cover ASSY Frame Front cover ASSY Fig 4 59 4 33 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 3 13 NCU 1 Disconnect the connector 2 Remove the two cup S M3x6 Taptite screws and then remove the NCU unit 3 7 gt SJ S N SN ES WM NCU harness S y S Z Main PCB ASSY NCU unit Taptite cup S M3x6 3 Remove the cup S M3x6 Taptite screw and then remove the NCU shield cover 4 Disconnect the two connectors of the NCU harness 5 Remove the two cup S M3x6 Taptite screws and then remove the NCU PCB ASSY Taptite cup S M3x6 NCU shield plate NCU harness NCU shield cover PS Taptite cup S M3x6 Taptite cup S M3x6 NCU PCB ASSY Fig 4 61 4 34 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 14 Fixing Unit 1 Disconnect the heater harness and thermistor harness 2 Remove the bind B M4x12 Taptite screw and the shoulder screw and then remove the fixing unit Fixing unit T R CA o Shoulder screw Heater harness JE Ce Taptite bind B M4x12 Q Thermistor harness Fig 4 62 3 Remove the three cup B M3x10 Taptite scr
226. s Er 2012 GND 15c EMI k i gt orR32 GND h i c GND 2912198 80d ANE dW OL 10k c70 C103 T GND GND vcc3 EMI Q CTN gt Wa l LED ON Eesen BLAN 1 NI 21m 2012 0c72 vCC3 GI 80 50V 14 Eus I eR39 GND 4X MP PAPER 4 t oc34 orao Ge 100 J GND O GND EZ ME 3a S ML 5 M2 8 e TER A 54 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL Appendix 4 8 Engine PCB Circuit Diagram 2 2 x1 O os OVCC3 2 2k cre GND El R21 10 4 Mo vss OGND 1 p02 OVCC3 HV VERSION Cem AT 49 8 200MHZ ces vec3 x C103 ES DD42l ovcc3 ELD c5 c31 EA sv coa LVPS SLEEP GND O SCANENS ou TS UFS1A101MCA L asa OGND DSxL9 HV TRANSFF o 57 GNO Pich F 2 5 i os 14 c A oes ES ces EFESETN gt 35 OFES a AE C103 T S86 OGND GND J EMS o HV TRANSPWM GND 16 c 13 ERO ERXD 5 D z EDO R36 Cas p 100 C401 a 29 O vcc24 DCSTAR Ze 3A LVPS SLEEP 2o o SCAN SLEEFONN HV TRANSFB 38 2 68 31 T 2 68 K SCAN LOCKN CIDCLOCKI DC SCAN CLK gc HEATER ON 2 68 outy 80x 260 B3B EH SOFT HEATER CNTROL R50 JV HEATER OFF 24 TONER CMPOUT S Q 35 CISCNLOCKN ave ggg PO START SCANCI E KAK HV CHARGE fens HEATER OFFN Res rz 3 ma SS 100 HV NOISESENSN re ONSENSNILATCH cae Duer HV TRANSFB CN1 el RANSFBL maer HV VCLN MAIN 18 5 6A DC LOCKN mo ONER a HV VCLN OVCC3 vcc3 vcc3 6 6c c3 H E CHARGE gg ORGE 40V Cleo 1 b HEATER CMPOUT pe oe UFS1A101MCA d 05xL9 R37 R48 R M Z Pitch F 2 5 1k p 1 DX TRAY
227. s a CNG signal as long as the line is connected A 26 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL WSW21 TAD setting 1 1 Not used 7 Erasure of message stored in the memory after the message transfer e Selector8 Erasure of message Setting this selector to 0 will erase the message recorded in the memory after the document retrieval feature transfers the message WSW22 ECM setting 1 ECM in sending 0 ON 1 OFF 2 ECM in receiving 0 ON 1 OFF 3 Call Waiting Caller ID 0 ON 1 OFF 4 Not used 8 ECM Error correction mode NOTE e Selector 8 is applicable to the American version only but not applicable to those models equipped with high speed modem e Selectors 5 through 8 are applicable to the Asian version only e Selector 3 Call Waiting Caller ID Setting this selector to 0 allows the user to decide whether or not to interrupt the current call when a new call comes in If Call Waiting Caller ID service is available in the area and the user subscribes to it he she can see information about his her incoming call A 27 APPENDIX 3 FIRMWARE SWITCHS WSW WSW23 Communications setting Starting point of training check 0 From the head of a series of zeros From any arbitrary point 1 No Allowable training error rate 10 8 wen le Limitation of attenuation level 0 Yes 1 No NOTE Selector 8 is not applicable to the French versions 2 3 4 16 Decoding error rate for
228. s applicable only to the U S A versions e Selector 2 Ringer OFF setting This selector determines whether or not the ringer can be set to OFF e Selector 4 Detection of distinctive ringing pattern If this selector is set to 1 the machine detects only the number of rings if it is set to 0 the machine detects the number of rings and the ringing time length to compare the detected ringing pattern with the registered distinctive one A 31 APPENDIX 3 FIRMWARE SWITCHS WSW WSW28 Function setting 6 Transmission level of DTMF high band frequency signal S CH CH CH CH ch OO sch OO O NW ch OH sch D sch O sch OG Transmission level of DTMF low band frequency signal Newsa e Selectors 1 through 6 Transmission level of DTMF high low band frequency signal 4 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 s OO OH seh eh CO Ol sch CO eh P eh OH eh OO 0 These selectors are intended for the manufacturer who tests the machine for the Standard Never access them A 32 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL WSW29 Function setting 7 Not used 8 WSW30 Function setting 8 Not used 1 3 4 Duty cycle control of pulsed current for the heat fixing unit Drum cleaning prompt settings Not used NOTE Selector 4 is applicable to the European version only e Selector 4 Duty cycle control of pulsed current for the heat fixing unit Setting this selector to 1 activates the duty cycle control that suppresses t
229. s maximum print speed when you first start printing e Max speed is 20 cpm or more It varies depending on the paper size 2 14 Toner Cartridge Weight Information Toner cartridge weight approx weight TN3030 TN540 Brand new toner cartridge weight 772 59 Toner weight at brand new toner cartridge 142 5 2 59 Toner cartridge weight at toner near empty 693 5 to 698 59 Remain toner weight at toner near empty 80 to 85g 80 to 85g Toner cartridge weight at toner empty 678 5 to 683 59 678 5 to 683 59 Remain toner weight at toner empty 65 to 70g 65 to 70g You can print 500 to 600 pages with 10g toner Without yellow protector Toner cartridge weight may vary within 2 to 3g depending on the cartridge weight 1 8 3 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL SERIAL NO DESCRIPTIONS The descriptions below show how to understand the meanings of the numbers printed on the labels or bag of the machine and machine parts lt ID for production month gt A January B February C March D April E May F June G July H August J September K October L November M December lt ID for year gt 3 2003 4 2004 lt ID for factory gt 9 Kariya Plant A Mie Brother C BIUK J Buji Nan Ling Factory 1 Machine Printed on the label attached on the rear of the main body lt Example gt lt MODEL NO gt lt SERIAL NO gt a A Esa SEQUENTIAL NO FACTORY ID NO YEAR MONTH 2 Process unit Imprinted on the alumin
230. s shorter than 80mm Jam caused by a paper feed delay Jam caused by the paper not being sensed when ejected from the paper eject sensor Jam caused by the paper not being sensed when ejected from the paper eject sensor 6 15 The front regist sensor or paper eject sensor is turned on The front regist sensor is not returning properly and is not turning off The front regist sensor was turned off early Malfunction of actuator or hardware noise Paper was not fed in at the proper timing due to paper dust or wear of the rubber pick up roller The paper eject sensor is not working properly and has not turned off single printing The paper eject sensor or front regist sensor is not working properly and has not turned off continuous printing Remove the paper inside the machine If there is no paper check the suspect sensors referring to 3 9 Sensor Operational Check in Chapter 7 Check front regist sensor motion referring to 3 9 Sensor Operational Check in Chapter 7 Check the front regist sensor referring to 3 9 Sensor Operational Check in Chapter 7 Remove the paper dust attached to the pick up roller If the rubber is worn out replace it with a new one Check sensor motion referring to 3 9 Sensor Operational Check in Chapter 7 Check sensor motion referring to 3 9 Sensor Operational Check in Chapter 7 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 3
231. s the 1 and 0 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode The machine displays the WSW00 on the LCD and becomes ready to accept a firmware switch number 2 Enter the desired number from the firmware switch numbers 01 through 50 The following appears on the LCD Selector 1 Selector 8 y WSWXX 00000000 3 Use the left arrow and right arrow keys to move the cursor to the selector position to be modified 4 Enter a value to be set 0 or 1 using the 0 and 1 keys 5 Press the Set button This operation saves the newly entered selector values onto the EEPROM and readies the machine for accepting a firmware switch number 6 Repeat steps 2 through 5 until the modification for the desired firmware switches is completed 7 Press the Stop Exit button to return the machine to the initial stage of the maintenance mode NOTE e To cancel this operation and return the machine to the initial stage of the maintenance mode during the above procedure press the Stop Exit button e fthere is a pause of more than one minute after a single digit number is entered for double digit firmware switch numbers the machine will automatically return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode Details of Firmware Switches The details of the firmware switches are described in Appendix 3 in which the user accessible selectors of the firmware switches are shaded 7 10 3 5 2 Printout of firmware switch data
232. se soldering irons for use with lead free solder are three to four times higher than those for conventional soldering irons with a temperature controller built in 7 No mixing of different solders When repairs are made on a PCB with an LF indication on it lead free solder with the same metal composition which is expressed by the digit following LF must be used on a single PCB For a PCB with an LF indication on it neither tin lead solder nor lead free solder with a different metal composition must be used Compatible solder for each countries are listed below Solders are freely available from each manufacturer Visit the web site below for more detail For Japan UK ALMIT JAPAN KR 19 SH RMA http www almit com Finland LFM 48 Germany France Sweden For World wide KESTER U S A KESTER245 http www kester com except KESTER285 Australia New Zealand For Worldwide CANADA CASTIN RMA2 http www aimsolder com 4 68 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 6 SCREW TORQUE LIST Main Body Parts code Parts name Location Tightening SP N m Kgf cm NCU PCB ASSY m 1 087320 616 Taptite cup S M3x6 NCU shield cover 0 686 50 098 7 1 2 Cover Parts code Parts name Location Tightening an Tl m Kgf cm Inner chute 7 chute 085412 216 Taptite bind B M4x12 Joint cover front L een i 0 784 0 098 8 1 Joint cover front R EN 087311 016 Taptite cup S M3x10 Driver PCB ASSY S 0 392 0 049 4 0 5
233. shooting NETT 6 59 10 14Web Browser Troubleshooting TRIP 6 59 10 15Internet Fax TroubleshoO lisis 6 60 CHAPTER 7 MAINTENANCE MODE 1 ener nnn nnn nnn 7 1 1 ENTRY INTO THE MAINTENANCE MODE cnica dais 7 1 2 LIST OF MAINTENANCE MODE FUNG ENEE eege ege eech 7 2 3 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF MAINTENANCE MODE FUNCTIONS 7 4 3 1 EEPROM Parameter Initialization Maintenance mode 01 91 7 4 3 2 Printout of Scanning Compensation Data Maintenance mode 05 7 5 3 3 ADF Performance Test Maintenance mode 08 aaaainaaananaan nanannnanannnananannaananaaanin 7 7 3 4 Test Pattern 1 Maintenance mode OO 7 8 3 5 Firmware Switch Setting and Printout aaaaaaaiiaaaaaaanaannnaaaaaaanaunnaaaanaaaaaanuaaaaaanaaaaaaaa 7 9 3 5 1 Firmware switch setting Maintenance mode 10 aaannnaaazaaaaaasaaaaaa saaananaaaananaanannananana 7 9 3 5 2 Printout of firmware switch data Maintenance mode 1 7 11 3 6 Operation Check of LCD Maintenance mode 172 7 12 3 7 Operational Check of Control Panel PCB Maintenance mode 13 7 13 3 8 Receiver Volume Adjustment Maintenance mode 16 7 14 3 9 Sensor Operational Check Maintenance mode 2721 7 15 3 10 Received Data Transfer Function Maintenance mode D3 7 17 3 11 Fine Adjustment of Scan Start End Positions Maintenance mode 54
234. sion 4 0 driver supporting Brother Native Compression mode and bi directional capability Apple Macintosh Quick Draw Driver and PostScript PPD for OS 8 6 9 2 05 X 10 1 10 2 1 or Greater HQ1200 Max 2400 x 600 dots inch Up to 20cpm A4 size Recommended Cable A bi directional shielded parallel cable that is IEEE 1284 compliant and not longer than 6 feet 2m A Hi Speed USB 2 0 cable that is not longer than 6 feet 2m e Please make sure that you use a Hi Speed USB 2 0 certified cable if your computer uses a Hi Speed USB 2 0 interface e Even if your computer has a USB 1 1 interface you can connect the MFC e To meet FCC CISPR emission requirements for the MFC you must attach the included filter core and cable tie to the parallel interface cable 2 9 Consumable Items Toner Cartridge Life TN 540 TN 3030 Standard toner cartridge Up to 3 500 pages Expectancy Drum Unit Life Expectancy TN 570 TN 3060 High yield toner cartridge Up to 6 700 pages when printing letter size or A4 paper at 5 print coverage NOTE Toner life expectancy will vary depending upon the type of average print job Up to 20 000 pages NOTE There are many factors that determine the actual drum life such as temperature humidity type of paper toner you use and number of pages per print job 1 4 2 10 Network 2 11 Interface Protocol Control Update of Programs Supplied Software Paper 2 11 1 Feedable paper
235. solves the problem Main PCB 4 Replacement of main PCB solves the problem a normal part a normal part Harness Harness wire is damaged Yes Replace the harness with a between main normal part PCB and NCU 6 29 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING Step Connection Main PCB and NCU PCB are Fix the connection properly between main properly connected PCB and NCU PCB PCB NCU PCB Replacement of NCU PCB solves the problem a normal part solves the problem Replace the main PCB with a normal part Harness Harness wire is damaged Yes Replace the harness with a between main normal part PCB and NCU 6 30 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 8 IMAGE DEFECTS 8 1 Image Defect Examples Ir e l 1 Light l 2 Dark l 3 Completely blank l 4 All black l 5 Dirt on back of paper l 6 Black vertical l 6 Black vertical 1 7 Black horizontal 1 8 Black vertical l 9 White vertical streaks streaks stripes streaks streaks P E F 9 1 10 White horizontal I 11 Faulty 1 12 Poor fixing 1 13 Image distortion streaks registration 1 14 Faint print m 1 15 White spots l 16 Black spots 1 17 Black band 1 18 Gray background 1 19 Hollow print mH ES LP BSS l 20 Downward fogging 1 21 Horizontal lines 1 22 Light rain 1 23 Ghost 1 24 Toner specks of solid black Fig 6 9 8 2 Diameter of Rollers The diameter of each roller and the pitch which appears in the image are listed below Diamete
236. someone with supervisor privileges or ADMIN for Netware 4 or later servers go into PCONSOLE or NWADMIN select PRINT FAX SERVER INFORMATION and select the name of the print fax server make sure that you have entered the print fax server name If you can see Print Fax Server Status and Control in the menu then the Brother print fax server is visible to the network proceed to subsection 10 11 Novell NetWare Troubleshooting Otherwise go to step 3 If you are running AppleTalk for Macintosh In case of using Postscript driver make sure that you can see the print fax server name under the LaserWriter 8 icon in the Chooser If it is visible then the connection is good so proceed to subsection 10 12 AppleTalk Troubleshooting Otherwise go to step 3 If you use the Rendevous function please visit the Brother Solution Center web site on http solutions brother com 6 53 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 10 2 3 If you cannot make any of the connections in step 2 check the following 4 a Make sure the machine is powered on and on line b Check the cabling network connection and print out a configuration page in the Network STATISTICS information to see if bytes are being transmitted and received c Check to see if there is any LED activity The NC 9100h print fax server has two LEDs on the back panel of the machine The upper side LED shows Link Speed status The lower side LED shows Activity Receive Transmit
237. ss 5P h Sub gear plate Taptite cup S M3x6 Main motor harness Main motor ASSY 5 Ground spring Taptite bind B M4x12 TU Taptite cup S M3x6 6 Fig 4 108 4 59 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 11 Remove the four cup S M3x6 Taptite screws and then remove the main motor ASSY 12 Remove the develop joint and joint spring from the drive unit 13 Release the two hooks from the develop joint and remove the joint stopper Develop joint Joint stopper Joint spring Taptite cup S M3x6 Main motor ASSY Drive unit Fig 4 109 14 Remove the gear 40 54Y gear 17 planetary gear 45 arm F R and gear 20 center F R from the frame L Gear 40 54Y ert Gear 17 Gear 45 Gear 20 planetary arm F R center F R Fig 4 110 4 60 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 15 Remove the bind B M3x10 Taptite screw 16 Remove the P R solenoid ASSY the P R solenoid lever and the solenoid release spring P R 17 Remove the bind B M3x10 Taptite screw 18 Remove the F R solenoid ASSY and solenoid release spring F R Solenoid release spring F R aS EU F R solenoid Dent NA RK Taptite bind B M3x10 z 7 P R solenoid lever Solenoid release spring P R P R solenoid ASSY Taptite bind B M3x10 Fig 4 111 19 Disconnect the connector from the document cover sensor 20 Remove the bind B M3x10 Taptite screw 21 Remove the toner LED PCB unit ASSY 22 Remove t
238. ss ipp Get More Info option in Windows 2000 not working Go to Printer s Web site in Windows XP not working If you are using a URL of http ip address 631 or http ip address 631 ipp the Get More Info option in Windows 2000 or the Go to Printer s Web site option in Windows XP will not function If you wish to use the Get More Info or the Go to Printer s Web site option use the following URL http ip address This will then force Windows 2000 XP to use Port 80 to communicate with the Brother print fax server Windows 95 98 Me clients not able to get the driver from a Windows 2000 XP system You must be using version 4 0 or later of Internet Explorer and the Microsoft Internet Print Services software must be installed on your client computers 6 57 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 10 11 Novell Netware Troubleshooting If you cannot print from NetWare and you have checked the hardware and network as described in the previous steps first verify that the Brother print fax server is attached to the server queue by going to PCONSOLE selecting PRINT QUEUE INFORMATION and then CURRENTLY ATTACHED SERVERS If the print fax server does not appear in the list of attached servers then check the following NOTE It is always a good idea to try followings in order to eliminate the possibility of setup errors e Turning off the machine and then on again to force to rescan the Netware queue e Deleting and recreating the print fax
239. t bend the pressure plate gently ease the plastic cover Ifthe pressure plate is deformed paper feeding problems may occur 17 Remove the herical extension spring 18 Remove the lock lever Paper tray Herical extension spring AA Lock lever Lock lever Paper tray Fig 4 15 NOTE When re assembling the lock lever insert it upwards from underneath the cassette and rotate it until the two catches lock into place 4 10 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 19 Remove the cup B M3x8 Taptite screw and then remove the side guide gear and the friction spring 20 Remove the two side guide racks Taptite cup B M3x8 Side guide gear A SE S Side guide rack Friction spring SS AA Side guide rack Fig 4 16 21 Remove the paper indicator Paper tray Paper indicator Fig 4 17 4 11 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y NOTE e When re assembling the side guide racks they should both be aligned so that the wide end of the racks are in line with the inside edge of the paper guide release slots in the tray before refitting the spring and gear e When replacing re assembling the paper tray remove the old grease and apply a suitable amount of grease onto both sides of the paper tray referring to the figure below Grease Molykote PG 662 Grease Molykote PG 662 2 mm dia ball Wd 2 mm dia ball l i O ul S l TLA Pf IS Paper tray Fig 4 18 22
240. t for the machine to cool down before you touch the internal parts of the machine Fig 6 6 6 Release the jam clear cover and take out the jammed paper Jam clear cover 6 13 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 Close the jam clear cover Close the back output tray 8 Push the lock lever down and take the toner cartridge out of the drum unit Take out the jammed paper if there is any inside the drum unit Fig 6 8 9 Install the toner cartridge on the drum unit and then install the drum unit on the machine 10 Put the paper tray in the machine 11 Close the front cover 3 3 2 Causes amp countermeasures MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL The causes for paper jam problems vary depending on the location of the paper jam When a paper jam occurs inside the machine you have to find the location of the paper jam first remove the jammed paper and then take the appropriate countermeasure referring to the table below Jam when the machine is turned on Top of paper stopped at 350mm from the second exit roller Next paper is not fed Bottom of paper stopped around the transfer roller Top of paper stopped between the paper feed roller and the pick up roller Top of paper stopped at 50mm from the contact point of the heat roller and pressure roller Jam after paper is ejected Paper stuck Jam caused by paper length detected as longer than 400mm 16 in Jam caused by paper length detected a
241. t to 1 otherwise the machine may mistakenly detect PC powered off e Selector5 Escape from phase C This selector determines whether or not the machine will escape from phase C when it detects an RTC Return to Control in non ECM mode or an RCP Return to Control Partial page in ECM mode e Selectors 6 through 8 Lower limit of frequency to be ignored after detection of calling signals Ci At the start of reception if the machine detects the frequency of calling signals Ci specified by selectors 1 through 4 of WSW14 it will start the ringer sounding When doing so the machine may fail to detect the calling signals normally due to noises superimposed at the time of reception To prevent it use selectors 6 through 8 of WSW36 If the machine detects higher frequencies than the lower limit specified by these selectors it will regard them as noise and interpret that detecting state as being normal allowing the ringer to keep sounding until the machine starts automatic reception of FAX data if in the FAX mode according to the preset number of ringers A 37 APPENDIX 3 FIRMWARE SWITCHS WSW WSW37 Function setting 15 Printout of the stored image data of an unsent document onto the error report Not used Erasure of the stored image data of o an unsent document at the time of the subsequent in memory message transmission 3 8 e Selector 1 Printout of the stored image data of an unsent document onto an er
242. t used Less than 50 of white level date is ee e NENNEN e Driver PCB e Main PCB Not used CIS home position sensor remains OFF In other words the CIS unit does not return to the home position AE Not used CIS home position sensor remains ON In other words the CIS unit remains in the home position Scanner motor harness half inserted e Scanner motor harness gt a UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ gt O UJ O1 R OO N O Not used Dark level offset data level error e CIS for scanning e Main PCB Not used Gain control data level error for scanning B Not used Scan area left edge detection CIS error Main PCB Black markings on the white level reference film inside the scanner top cover Not used Scan area right edge detection error 9 U Not used Horizontal scanning edge reduction detection error in scanning area setting A D converter standard voltage failure at High side A D converter standard voltage failure at Low side Scanning light source failure CIS Main PCB Not used Magnification failure of virtual white level Scanning white level failure e CIS e Main PCB e White tape Not used Virtual white level data failure in Photo mode Black level data error CIS Main PCB Not used Detection failure of black marks e CIS on white La standard film e Driver PCB Not used Horizontal scanning edge siti detection error in scanning area setting UJ m e Blac
243. tancy 20 000 pages When printing A4 size paper at 5 print coverage The life expectancy of the drum unit is approximately 20 000 pages when printing A4 size paper at 5 print coverage The actual number of pages that your drum will print varies depending on an average print job type and type of paper to be used NOTE e There are many factors that determine the actual drum life such as temperature humidity type of paper type of toner used number of pages per print job and so on Under ideal conditions the average drum life is estimated at up to 20 000 pages The actual number of pages that your drum will print may be significantly less than this estimate Because we have no control over the many factors that determine the actual drum life we cannot guarantee a minimum number of pages that will be printed by your drum e For best performance use only genuine Brother toner The machine should be used only in a clean dust free environment with adequate ventilation e Printing with a third party drum unit may reduce not only the print quality but also the quality and life of the machine itself Warranty coverage does not apply to problems caused by the use of third party drum unit 5 1 CHAPTER 5 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE lt Change Drum message gt If the LCD shows the message below it means the drum unit is near the end of its life We recommend that you replace the drum unit with a new one before there is a noticeable deteriorat
244. tep 2 is appears on XXXXXXXXX If itis OK press the Stop Exit button and press the 9 key twice to exit from the maintenance mode If something other than that is printed in XXXXXXXXX check the connection between the PC and machine and go back to step 1 A 5 APPENDIX 3 FIRMWARE SWITCHS WSW APPENDIX 3 FIRMWARE SWITCHS WSW A 6 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL WSWO1 Dial pulse setting Dial pulse generation mode Inter digit pause Switching between pulse DP and tone PB dialing by the function switch Default dialing mode pulse DP o tone PB dialing 60 ms Break time length in pulse dialing 67 ms 40 ms for 16 PPS 64 ms at 106 ms intervals e Selectors 1 and 2 Dial pulse generation mode These selectors set the number of pulses to be generated in pulse dialing N Dialing N generates N pulses Dialing 0 generates 10 pulses N 1 Dialing N generates N 1 pulses 10 N Dialing N generates 10 N pulses e Selectors 3 and 4 Break time length in pulse dialing These selectors set the break time length in pulse dialing Example lf 1 2 and 3 are dialed when N is set by selectors 1 and 2 Break time length set by selectors 3 and 4 A BR ARS CONUS a 1 p 3 e Selectors 5 and 6 Inter digit pause These selectors set the inter digit pause in pulse dialing Example f 1 2 and 3 are dialed when N is set by selectors 1 and 2 cy f i IN
245. ter 29 The model you are installing will be listed in the window Select Yes or No if you want this driver to be your default printer and then click Next If this screen appears select Do not share this printer and Next oelect Yes and Next to print a test page When this screen appears click Finish When this screen appears click Continue Anyway NOTE e There will be two Brother printer drivers listed in the Printers selection e The driver with Printer after the model name ex Brother MFC 8220 Printer is the Brother Native Driver OK The Brother Native Drivers have been installed and the installation is now complete CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND BASIC OPERATION 3 2 2 For Parallel Interface Cable Users For Windows 95 98 98SE Me 2000 Professional XP 1 2 owitch off and unplug the machine from the AC outlet and disconnect it from your computer if you already connected an interface cable Turn on your computer For Windows 2000 Professional XP you must be logged on as the administrator Insert the supplied CD ROM for Windows into your CD ROM drive If the model name screen appears select your machine If the language screen appears select your language The CD ROM main menu will appear Click Install Software NOTE If this window does not appear use Windows Explore to run the setup exe program from the root directory of the Brother CD ROM Click MFL Pro Suite in Main Application NOTE
246. ter Wizard will start When this screen appears click Next 26 Un check the Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer selection and then click Next 27 Select BMFC Brother MFL Port from the pull down window for the Printer Port Selection and then click Next 28 Click on Have Disk 2 20 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 29 Browse the CD ROM and highlight your language folder and click Open Highlight the W2K folder and click Open Highlight the Addprt folder and click Open 30 Click Open 31 Make sure X ENG W2K Addprt is displayed in the window and click OK XA is the drive letter of your CD ROM 32 Highlight the model you are installing from the list of machines and click Next NOTE Make sure you select a USB printer 33 The model you are installing will be listed in the window Select Yes or No if you want this driver to be your default printer and then click Next 34 If this screen appears select Do not share this printer and Next 35 Select Yes and Next to print a test page 36 When this screen appears click Finish 37 If the Digital Signature Not Found dialog box appears click Yes 38 If the test page printed click OK NOTE e here will be two Brother printer drivers listed in the Printers selection e he driver with Printer after the model name ex Brother MFC 8220 Printer is the Brother Native Driver OK The Brother Native Drivers have been installed and th
247. ter the updates are installed your PC may restart e fit does the installation will automatically continue e f the installation does not continue automatically please open the installer menu again by double clicking the setup exe program on the Brother CD ROM and continue from Step 5 8 When the PaperPort 8 0 SE Setup window is displayed click Next 9 After reading and accepting the ScanSoft License Agreement enter your user information and click Next 10 Select Typical and click Next 11 Click Install and PaperPort will start installing on your computer 12 When the PaperPort 8 0 SE Registration screen is displayed make your selection and follow the on screen instructions 13 Click Finish to complete installation 2 23 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND BASIC OPERATION 14 When the Brother MFL Pro Suite Installation window appears click Next NOTE If an error message appears at this point in the installation process or you have previously installed MFL Pro Suite you will first have to uninstall it From the Start menu select Programs Brother Brother MFL Pro Suite Uninstall and then follow the instructions on the screen 15 When the Brother Software License Agreement window appears click Yes lf you agree to it and go to next screen 16 Select Local Interface and then click Next 17 When the Setup Type window appears select Standard and then click Next NOTE If you want to install t
248. the connection properly between main properly connected PCB and NCU PCB Harness Harness wire is damaged Replace the harness with a between main normal part PCB and NCU PCB solves the problem normal part pore has solves the problem a normal part solves the problem a normal part 6 28 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL Speaker is silent during on hook dialing Step Connection Main PCB and speaker are Fix the connection properly between main properly connected Replace the speaker with a normal part PCB and speaker Fix the connection properly Replacement of speaker solves the problem Main PCB and NCU PCB are properly connected Harness wire is damaged Yes Replace the harness with a normal part es Speaker E Step_ Connection between main PCB and NCU PCB Harness between main PCB and NCU PCB Connection between main PCB and control panel PCB Harness between main PCB and control panel PCB solves the problem a normal part solves the problem a normal part Dialing function does not switch between tone and pulse Step Connection Main PCB and NCU PCB are Fix the connection properly between main properly connected PCB and NCU PCB Main PCB and control panel Fix the connection properly PCB are properly connected Harness wire is damaged Replace the harness with a normal part Replacement of NCU PCB PCB NCU PCB Replacement of NCU PCB
249. the paper used meets the recommended paper specifications A rough surfaced paper damp paper or thick media can cause the problem 2 Check that the appropriate media type is selected in the printer driver 3 The problem may disappear by itself Try printing multiple pages to clear this problem especially if the machine has not been used for a long time 4 The drum unit may be damaged Install a new drum unit Seen Developing bias Are the developing bias Clean the electrodes contact failure contacts between the machine at both sides and toner cartridge dirty 6 39 CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 11 Faulty registration load paper tray more than 27mm loads below 27mm in depth high Excessive paper Is the paper loaded in the Instruct the user to keep paper Is the specified weight of the Recommend to use the recommended paper being specified types of paper used 2 3 Is the first printing position Adjust the Y offset by using the within 1mm of the tolerance utility software supplied specification 4 Rear regist Is the position of the rear regist Reposition the sensor to the sensor position sensor normal correct position incorrect H Paper 1 Is thick paper of more than 158 Recommend to use the g m being used specified types of paper Toner sensor 2 Is the problem solved by Yes 1 If toner is out replace the failure replacing the drum unit or the toner cartridge toner cartridge 2 The toner s
250. tion are good by printing the machine settings page If the test fails check a If the LED is not blinking after connected to the network then the network firmware settings may be corrupted Please refer to step 3 b In this event try to restore the factory default settings of the print fax server To learn how to reset the print server set APIPA to off using control panel Once you have done that switch the machine off and then on again and try to print out the configuration page If the configuration page is prints but you cannot print documents try the following NOTE If none of the following steps are successful there is almost certainly a hardware or network problem a x If you are using TCP IP Try pinging the print fax server from the host operating system command prompt with the command ping ipaddress Where ipadaress is the print fax server IP address note that in some instances it can take up to two minutes for the print fax server to load its IP address after setting the IP address If a successful response is received then proceed to the UNIX TCP IP Windows NT LAN Server Windows 98 95 Me Peer to Peer LPR Internet Printing or Web Browser troubleshooting section Otherwise proceed to step 3 and then go to subsection 10 3 TCP IP Troubleshooting If you are using Novell system Verify that the machine server can be seen on the network To do this login as the SUPERVISOR not as
251. tions Lead free solder does not contain the toxic substance lead however inhalation of the fumes may adversely affect the health of workers The silver contained in lead free solder is also a toxic substance though it is not as toxic as lead and therefore a localized ventilation system and gloves are required for lead free solder soldering operations as required for those with conventional solder 4 67 CHAPTER 4 DISASSEMBLY AND RE ASSEMBL Y 6 Soldering irons When soldering is performed manually using lead free solder a soldering iron that has little reduction in its temperature needs to be used This refers to a soldering iron that has a smaller degree of decrease in the temperature at the soldering iron s tip such as when the soldering iron is applied to the base metal or solder is supplied and the temperature is soon returned to the specified temperature With soldering operations using lead free solder the requirement for the temperature of the soldering iron s tip is the same as that for conventional solder however the melting point of lead free solder is higher than that of conventional solder so productivity will decrease with conventional soldering irons Some tool manufacturers sell soldering irons designed for lead free solder and that can maintain the productivity of the soldering operations The soldering irons used at BIL are model no 941 manufactured by HAKKO and M6 SIC 40 manufactured by BONKOTE The prices of the
252. to 216mm ADF Height 3 9 to 14 0 100mm to 356mm 208mm x 291mm 203mm x 291mm 256 levels Standard Confidential Sequential Timer Automatic Light Dark manual setting Horizontal 203 dot inch 8 dot mm Vertical e Standard 98 line inch 3 85 line mm e Fine Photo 196 line inch 7 7 line mm e Superfine 392 line inch 15 4 line mm 32 16 x 2 300 stations Three times 0 to 10 rings Up to 600 pages Brother 1 Chart Up to 600 pages Brother 1 Chart 2 6 Specifications for Document Feeding System 2 6 1 Specifications for document Length of document 100mm to 360mm Width of document 148mm to 216mm ADF 64 to 90g m 17 to 24Ib 0 07mm to 0 12mm 0 06mm to 0 12mm Thickness of document Weight of document 52 to 90g m 14 to 24lb 1 3 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 2 6 2 Specifications for ADF ADF method Friction separation using round rollers and separation pads XEROX 4024DP 201b 30 sheets Letter 1 Number of sheets handled by ADF Max 24lb 20 sheets Letter XEROX 4200 20lb 30 sheets Letter 51 1 Be sure to place the edge of sheets in a wedge shape in the environment with temperature of 20 to 30 degree C and humidity of 50 to 70 The maximum number of sheets is 20 in the other environments 2 7 Printer Printer Driver Resolution Print Speed 2 8 Interfaces Interface Parallel cable USB cable NOTE Windows 95 98 98SE Me 2000 Professional XP NT 4 0 Workstation Ver
253. ton in hook up dialing e Selectors 4 through 6 Detection of 2nd dial tone Upon detection of the 2nd dial tone for the time length specified by these selectors the machine starts dialing This setting is effective only when the 2nd dial tone detection function is activated by selectors 1 through 3 Setting 101 110 or 111 This function does not apply in those countries where no dial tone detection function is supported e Selector 7 No of 2nd dial tone detection times This selector sets the number of dial tone detection times required for starting dialing e Selector 8 2nd dial tone interrupt detecting time This selector sets the allowable time length of an interrupt which should not be interpreted as an interrupt in the 2nd tone dialing A 12 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL WSW07 Dial tone setting 1 1 Frequency band range Narrows by 10 Hz 2 Initial value Widens by 10 Hz No 2nd dial tone detection level Z 600 Q 4 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 OO eh O O O O O eh O eh O O 7 1st dial ct tone interrupt detecting RR fv B BR ime 5 CT 000 LLL NOTE Selectors 1 2 4 through 7 are not applicable in those countries where no dial tone or line current detection is supported e g U S A e Selectors 1 and 2 Frequency band range These selectors set the frequency band for the 1st dial tone and the busy tone before dialing to be detected This setting is effective onl
254. tors 7 and 8 Encoding system Compression This selector determines whether or not use of the MR MMR coding system will be allowed A 16 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL WSW11 Busy tone setting Narrows by 10 Hz Initial value Widens by 10 Hz 1 250 750 250 750 ms 1 400 600 400 600 ms 1 Frequency band range 1 110 410 320 550 ms 1 100 660 100 660 ms e WSW 11 is not applicable in those countries where no busy tone detection is supported ON OFF time length ranges 175 440 175 440 ms More than one setting allowed 1 100 1000 17 660 ms NOTE e The setting of WSW11 is effective only when selectors 5 and 6 of WSW05 are set to 0 1 or 1 1 Busy tone detection e Selectors 1 and 2 Frequency band range These selectors set the frequency band for busy tone to be detected e Selectors 3 through 8 ON OFF time length ranges These selectors set the ON and OFF time length ranges for busy tone to be detected If more than one selector is set to 1 the ranges become wider For example if selectors 4 and 5 are set to 1 the ON and OFF time length ranges are from 175 to 600 ms APPENDIX 3 FIRMWARE SWITCHS WSW WSW12 Signal detection condition setting Min OFF time length of calling signal Ci Max OFF time length of calling signal Ci Detecting time setting O e Selectors 1 through 4 Min and max OFF time length of calling signal Ci If the machine detects the OFF state of calling sign
255. tuator Regist front actuator Fig 3 22 The regist rear actuator in the path from the feed roller to the transfer roller controls the first print position on the paper 3 15 CHAPTER 3 THEORY OF OPERATION 2 3 3 Paper eject After the printing image on the photosensitive drum is transferred onto the paper the paper is fed to the fixing unit to fix unfixed toner onto the paper Afterwards the paper is ejected from the fixing unit by the first eject roller in the fixing unit The paper eject actuator detects whether the paper is ejected correctly or not After the paper exits from the first eject roller the paper is turned by the rear cover and ejected face down into the top output tray through the second eject roller If the rear cover is open the paper is ejected face up straight to the printer rear straight paper path Second eject roller Rear cover LE a E Paper eject actuator First eject roller Fig 3 23 3 16 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 2 4 Sensors 2 4 1 Document cover sensor Detect opening and closing of the front cover WA Document cover sensor Fig 3 24 2 4 2 Toner sensors Detects if there is toner in the toner cartridge The toner sensor at the left side emits light through the window on the left side of the toner cartridge then the toner sensor at the right side receives it when the toner is low They also detect whether or not the drum unit is installed The tone
256. twork cable to the machine and then connect it to a free port on your hub Plug the machine into the AC power outlet Turn the power switch on Turn on your computer For Windows 2000 Professional XP and Windows NT 4 0 you must be logged on as the administrator Insert the supplied CD ROM for Windows into your CD ROM drive If the model name screen appears select your machine lf the language screen appears select your language The CD ROM main menu will appear Click Install Software NOTE If this window does not appear use Windows 2 Explore to run the setup exe program from the root directory of the Brother CD ROM Click MFL Pro Suite in Main Application NOTE e MFL Pro Suite includes Printer Driver Scanner Driver ScanSoft PaperPort ScanSoff Text Bridge PC FAX software and True Type fonts e PaperPorf is a document management application for viewing scanned documents e ScanSoft TextBridge which is integrated into PaperPorf is an OCH application that converts an image into text and inserts it into your default word processor Click Install NOTE e If you see the following screen click OK to install the Windows updates After the updates are installed your PC may restart e f it does the installation will automatically continue e f the installation does not continue automatically please open the installer menu again by double clicking the setup exe program from the root directory of the
257. uage screen appears select your language E 5 Click Install next to the MFL Pro Suite for your country 6 After the installation is completed restart your Macintosh 7 Connect the USB interface cable to your Macintosh and then connect it to the machine Caution Do not connect the machine to a USB port on a keyboard or a non powered USB hub 8 Plug the machine into the AC power outlet Turn the power switch on 9 From the Apple menu open the Chooser 10 Click the Brother Laser icon you installed On the right side of the Chooser select the printer to which you want to print Close the Chooser OK The Brother PC FAX Send Printer and Scanner drivers have been installed 11 To install Presto PageManager click Install next to the Presto PageManager icon and follow on the Screen instructions NOTE You can easily scan share and organize photos and documents using Presto PageManager OK Presto PageManager has been installed and the installation is now complete 2 28 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 3 2 6 For USB Interface Cable Users For Mac OS X 10 1 10 2 1 or greater Users 1 SLY 5 6 7 Turn off and unplug the machine from the AC outlet and disconnect it from your Macintosh if you already connected an interface cable Turn on your Macintosh Insert the supplied CD ROM for Macintosh into your CD ROM drive Double click the Start Here OSX icon to install the printer
258. um bag Drum unit with toner cartridge 3A11 JA L M PRODUCTION LINE NO MONTH DATE FACTORY ID NO 3 Drum unit Printed on the bar code label attached inside the drum unit A395100104A MONTH J YEAR PRODUCTION LINE NO SERIAL NO S 3 a P bibi The first time M The second time N The third time P 1 9 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 4 Toner cartridge Imprinted on the aluminum bag I Il DATE FACTORY ID NO MONTH i SERIAL NO L PRODUCTION LINE NO TN EN TONER VOLUME IEEE FACTORY ID NO 2 DR TN REUSE The first time M The second time N The third time P 5 Laser unit On the laser unit 25001 L PRODUCTION LOT NO LASER UNIT NO 5 LM2486001 Laser Unit ZL2E FACTORY ID NO 1 Kariya Plant 2 Buji Nan Ling Factory MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND BASIC OPERATION 1 1 1 1 2 CONDITIONS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION Power Supply The source voltage must stay within 10 of the rated voltage shown on the rating plate The power cord including extensions should not exceed 5 meters 16 5 feet Do no share the same power circuit with other high power appliances particularly an air conditioner copier or shredder If it is unavoidable that you must use the machine with these appliances it is recommended that you use an isolation transformer or a high frequency noise filter Use a voltage regulator if the power source is not
259. using preprinted or highly textured paper It is recommended to use labels or transparencies which are designed for use in laser printers Avoid feeding labels with the carrier sheet exposed or the machine will be damaged Before loading paper with holes such as organizer sheets be sure to fan the stack well Do not use organizer sheets that are stuck together The glue that is used might caused damaged to the machine When printing on the back of pre printed paper if the paper is curled be sure to straighten the paper as much as possible Different types of paper should not be loaded at the same time in the paper tray to avoid any paper jams or misfeeds 1 6 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL 2 11 2 Paper capacity EE UO Paper tray Tray 1 Manual feed tray Lower tray Tray 2 Paper capacity 250 sheets B0g m 250 sheets 80g m 2 11 3 Paper output 1 Face down output tray Output capacity Max 150 sheets 80g m Only in the case of face down output 2 Face up output tray Output capacity Max 1 sheet 80g m Only in the case of face up output Hint Face down output Output paper with its printed surface turned down Face up output Output paper with its printed surface turned up 3 The output methods according to paper types as shown below are recommended Paper types Plain paper 0 0 Thick paper B Recycled paper D Face down output Face up output PL 2 12 Printable Area Unprintable areas edge
260. voltage power supply PCB LCD Harness wire is damaged Replace the harness with a normal part power supply PCB are properly connected Harness wire is damaged Replace the harness with a normal part Replacement of LCD solves the problem normal part Replacement of control panel Replace the control panel PCB solves the problem PCB with a normal part Replacement of low voltage Ye Replace the low voltage power supply PCB solves the power supply PCB with a problem normal part Replacement of main PCB Y Replace the main PCB with solves the problem a normal part al Main PCB and low voltage ll Fix the connection properly Control panel PCB Low voltage power supply PCB Main PCB NO Yes NO Yes Yes Yes S es 6 24 MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL L 2 The control panel does not work User Check 1 No Ste Result Key sticking 1 Any key on control panel is es Clean up the panel cover or stuck remove the burrs from panel cover and panel keys Connection 2 Main PCB and control panel No Fix the connection properly between main PCB are properly connected PCB and control panel PCB Harness between main PCB and control panel PCB Connection of 4 FPC key is properly O FPC key connected FPC key Replacement of FPC key es solves the problem Control panel Replacement of control panel Yes Replace the control panel PCB PCB solves the problem PCB with a normal part Main PCB Replacement o
261. wering on the equipment but start it after carrying out a sequence of scanning operation Unless the equipment has carried out any scanning operation this function cannot print out correct scanning compensation data This is because at the start of scanning operation the equipment initializes white and black level data and takes in the scanning compensation reference data 1 Press the 0 and 5 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode The WHITE LEVEL 1 will appear on the LCD 2 The equipment prints out the scanning compensation data list containing the following a O CO D h 3 kb NOTE Dark output adjustment value Bright output adjustment value Light source adjustment value Black level MIN data Black level MAX data White level MIN data White level MAX data Background color compensated data Black level data White level data 1Byte 1Byte 1Byte 1Byte 1Byte 1Byte 1Byte 1Byte 2448Byte 2448Byte Upon completion of recording of the compensation data list the equipment returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode If any data is abnormal its code will be printed in inline style as shown on the next page 7 5 CHAPTER 7 MAINTENANCE MODE 2085 81 85 88 27 49f7aGe2 96 q9f788e3 c3 49f799f af Bgec7488 Mb 5gecT4BB i 31 59ec6ade S9ecbad2 cS 49fef5le 8B ZP 0 GO D D
262. y when selectors 1 through 3 of WSW0O5 are set to 1 1 1 e Selectors 4 through 6 2nd dial tone detection level These selectors set the detection level of the 2nd dial tone e Selector 7 1st dial tone interrupt detecting time This selector sets the allowable time length of an interrupt which should not be interpreted as an interrupt in the 1st dial tone dialing A 13 APPENDIX 3 FIRMWARE SWITCHS WSW WSWOS Dial tone setting 2 Z O 1st dial tone detection time length Ai sch sch CO OOO a OO OO ch OO O ND 1 3 4 Time out length for 1st and 2nd 5 dial tone detection No 6 7 8 000 Detection level of 1st dial tone 0 0 1 and busy tone before dialing O 1 0 O 1 1 100 10 1 110 1 1 1 NOTE The WSWO6 is not applicable in those countries where no dial tone detection is supported e g U S A e Selectors 1 through 3 1st dial tone detection time length Upon detection of the 1st dial tone for the time length set by these selectors the machine starts dialing This setting is effective only when selectors 1 through 3 of WSW0O5 are set to 1 1 1 e Selectors 4 and 5 Time out length for 1st and 2nd dial tone detection These selectors set the time out length for the 1st and 2nd dial tone detection so that the machine waits dial tone input for the specified time length and disconnects itself from the line when no dial tone is inputted MFC 8220 SERVICE MANUAL WSW09 Protocol definition 1

ZLH Service Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents